4-587-873-11 (1)
GB
Solid-State Memory Camcorder
Operating Instructions
PXW-X400 / PXW-X400KC / PXW-X400KF
Ver. 1.0
© 2015 Sony Corporation
0002
Table of Contents
1. Overview
5. Network Configuration
9. Connecting External Devices
Name and Function of Parts............................................... 3
Network Functions Supported by the Camcorder...........55
Connecting a Remote Control Unit.................................116
Screen Display...................................................................12
Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN..........................56
Connecting an External Monitor.....................................118
Connecting to the Internet...............................................59
Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer.....................119
Transferring Files...............................................................62
Configuring a Shooting and Recording System.............120
Transmitting Streaming Video and Audio.......................63
Recording External Input Signals...................................122
2. Preparation
Preparing a Power Supply................................................21
Attaching a Viewfinder.....................................................22
Using the Camcorder for the First Time...........................24
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens....................................25
Preparing the Audio Input System...................................26
Attaching and Adjusting Peripheral Devices....................27
Handling SxS Memory Cards............................................28
Handling SD Cards for Saving Configuration Data...........30
Using a Media Adaptor.....................................................31
3. Settings and Adjustments
Streaming High Quality Video..........................................64
Using Wi-Fi Remote Control.............................................65
Configuring from the Web Menu.....................................67
Supported Network Functions and Operating
Limitations................................................................71
6. Clip Operations
Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen.......................72
7. Menu Display and Settings
Format Settings.................................................................32
Setup Menu Organization.................................................78
Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance.............35
Basic Setup Menu Operations...........................................80
Setting the Electronic Shutter...........................................37
Editing the User Menu......................................................82
Setting Auto Iris................................................................38
Menu List...........................................................................84
Adjusting the Focus..........................................................40
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches.................106
Adjusting the Audio Level................................................41
Setting Time Data.............................................................43
4. Shooting
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
User Configuration Data..................................................109
User Files.........................................................................110
Basic Operations................................................................45
ALL Files..........................................................................111
Advanced Operations........................................................47
Scene Files.......................................................................112
Proxy Data.........................................................................51
Reference Files................................................................113
Planning Metadata...........................................................52
Lens Files.........................................................................114
Obtaining Location Information (GPS).............................54
Gamma Files...................................................................115
10. Maintenance and Inspection
Maintenance...................................................................123
Error/Warning System....................................................124
11. Appendix
Usage Precautions...........................................................127
Specifications..................................................................129
0003
1. Overview
Name and Function of Parts
5. Battery attachment shoe
Attach a BP-L80S Battery Pack. Alternatively, you
can attach an AC-DN2B/DN10 AC Adaptor to
operate the camcorder from an AC power supply.
Power Supply
6
“Preparing a Power Supply” (page 21)
“Attaching a Digital Wireless Receiver” (page 26)
[Note]
For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the
camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the BP-L80S Battery
Pack.
6. Camera adaptor connector
Enables connection of a CA-TX70/FB70 HD Camera
Adaptor. To connect an adaptor, remove the
cover.
1
2
1. LIGHT (video light) switch
Determines how a video light connected to the
LIGHT connector (page 4) is turned on and off.
AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video light
is in the on position, the video light is turned
on automatically while the camcorder is
recording.
MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off
manually, using its own switch.
[Note]
When the camcorder is set for recording in Picture Cache
mode, it is not possible to turn on the light before operation
to start recording is carried out (or while data is being stored
in memory).
3 4
5
2. POWER switch
Turns the main power supply on () and off ().
3. DC IN (DC power input) connector (XLR type,
4-pin, male)
4. DC OUT 12V (DC power output) connector
(4-pin, female)
Supplies power for an optional WRR855S/860C/861/862 UHF Synthesizer Diversity
Tuner or HDVF-L750 Viewfinder (maximum 1.8 A).
[Note]
Do not connect any equipment other than the UHF
synthesized diversity tuner.
0004
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
8. Lens mount securing rubber
After locking the lens in position using the lens
locking lever, fit this rubber over the lower of
the two projections. This fixes the lens mount,
preventing it from coming loose.
Accessory Attachments
1
2
3 45
Controls Near the Lens
9. Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob
(page 22)
10. Attachment for optional microphone holder
(page 26)
11. LIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin, female)
9
(page 27)
6
7
8
10
11
13. Lens cable clamp
Clamps the lens cable.
14. MIC IN (microphone input) (+48 V) connector
(XLR type, 5-pin, female)
Connect a stereo microphone to this connector.
The power (+48 V) is supplied via this connector.
15. LENS connector (12-pin) (page 25)
[Note]
When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable to this
connector, power off the camcorder first.
16. Tripod mount
When using the camcorder on a tripod, attach the
tripod adaptor (optional).
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1. Wireless receiver insertion slot
2. Shoulder strap fitting (page 27)
3. Accessory shoe (page 27)
4. Viewfinder front-to-back positioning lever
(page 23)
5. Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
(page 22)
6. Viewfinder attachment shoe (page 22)
7. VF (viewfinder) connectors (26-pin,
rectangular and 20-pin, round)
The analog interface connector (20-pin) is for
connection of an HDVF series viewfinder, and
the digital interface connector (26-pin) is for
connection of a CBK-VF02 HD viewfinder.
Use a connection cable to connect your viewfinder
to the corresponding connector.
[Note]
Do not connect viewfinders to both connectors at the same
time.
3
12. Shoulder pad (page 27)
17. Lens mount (special bayonet mount)
(page 25)
18. Lens locking lever (page 25)
19. Lens mount cap
Remove by pushing the lens locking lever up.
When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for
protection from dust.
1
4
5
2
6
1. REC START (recording start) button
Press to start recording. Press it again to stop
recording. The operation is the same as that of the
REC button on the lens.
2. SHUTTER switch
Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Push to
SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter
mode setting. When this switch is operated, the
new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for
about three seconds.
“Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 37)
0005
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
3. FILTER knob
Switches between four ND filters built into this
camcorder.
When this selector is used, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three
seconds.
FILTER knob
setting
ND filter
1
CLEAR
2
1/4 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/4)
3
1/16 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/16)
4
1/64 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/64)
You can change a Maintenance menu setting so
that different white balance settings can be stored
for different FILTER knob positions. This allows you
to automatically obtain optimum white balance
for the current shooting conditions in linkage with
the filter selection.
“Adjusting the White Balance” (page 35)
white balance adjustment function does not
operate.
BLACK: Adjust the black set and black balance
automatically.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even when
the ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) function is
operating.
If you push the switch to the WHITE side once
more during the automatic white balance
adjustment, the adjustment is canceled and
the white balance setting returns to the original
setting.
If you push the switch to the BLACK side once
more during the automatic black balance
adjustment, the adjustment is canceled and
the black balance setting returns to the original
setting.
LCD Monitor Side (1)
1
2
3
4
5
6. MIC (microphone) LEVEL knob (page 41)
6
10 12
789
11
12
4. MENU knob (page 80)
5. AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/black
balance adjustment) switch
Activates the automatic white/black balance
adjustment functions.
WHITE: Adjust the white balance automatically.
If the WHITE BAL switch (page 6) is set
to A or B, the white balance setting is stored
in the corresponding memory. If the WHITE
BAL switch is set to PRST, the automatic
13
14
0006
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
1. ASSIGN. (assignable) 1/2/3 switches
You can assign a function using Operation
>Assignable Switch in the setup menu
(page 106).
The ASSIGN. 1/3 switches are provided with an
indicator to show whether a function is assigned
to the switch (ON) or not (OFF).
2. ONLINE button
When network client mode or the streaming
function is assigned to this button, press and hold
until the indicator is lit orange. Then, press the
button again, turning the indicator blue, to enable
network client mode or the streaming function.
To exit the enabled function, press and hold the
button until the indicator turns off.
The button can also be used as an assignable
switch when assigned with functions other than
those above (page 107).
3. ALARM (alarm tone volume adjustment)
knob
Controls the volume of the warning tone that
is output via the built-in speaker or optional
earphones. When the knob is turned to the
minimum position, no sound can be heard.
However, if Maintenance >Audio >Min Alarm
Volume in the setup menu is set to [Set], the alarm
tone is audible even when this volume control is at
the minimum position.
ALARM
Minimum
Maximum
4. MONITOR (monitor volume adjustment)
knob
Controls the volume of the sound other than the
warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker
or earphones. When the knob is turned to the
minimum position, no sound can be heard.
5. MONITOR (audio monitor selection) switches
By means of combinations of the two switches,
you can select audio that you want to hear
through the built-in speaker or earphones.
When the lower switch is set to CH-1/2
Upper switch
Audio output
CH-1/CH-3
Channel 1 audio
MIX
Channels 1 and 2 mixed audio
(stereo) a)
CH-2/CH-4
Channel 2 audio
When the lower switch is set to CH-3/4
Upper switch
Audio output
CH-1/CH-3
Channel 3 audio
MIX
Channels 3 and 4 mixed audio
(stereo) a)
CH-2/CH-4
Channel 4 audio
a)By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE jack,
you can hear the audio in stereo. (Maintenance >Audio
>Headphone Out in the setup menu must be set to
Stereo.)
6. ASSIGN. (assignable) 0 switch
You can assign a function using Operation
>Assignable Switch in the setup menu
(page 106).
Off is assigned to these switches when the
camcorder is shipped from the factory.
This is a momentary type switch. Each press of the
switch turns the function assigned to this switch
on or off.
7. GAIN switch
Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match
the lighting conditions during shooting. The gain
values corresponding to the L, M, and H settings
can be selected using Operation >Gain Switch in
the setup menu (page 88) (factory settings are
L=0 dB, M=6 dB, and H=12 dB).
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three
seconds.
8. OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic
contrast control) switch
Switches the video signal output from the camera
module, between the following two.
BARS: Output the color bar signal.
CAM: Output the video signal being shot. When
this is selected, you can switch DCC 1) on and
off.
1)DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very bright
background with the iris opening adjusted to the subject,
objects in the background will be lost in the glare. The
DCC function will suppress the high intensity and restore
much of the lost detail. It is particularly effective for
shooting in the following cases.
ˎˎ Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day
ˎˎ Shooting a subject indoors, against a background
through a window
ˎˎ Any high contrast scene
9. WHITE BAL (white balance memory) switch
Controls adjustment of the white balance.
PRST: Adjust the color temperature to the preset
value (the factory default setting: 3200K). Use
this setting when you have no time to adjust
the white balance.
A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment
settings already stored in A or B. Push the
AUTO W/B BAL switch (page 5) to the
WHITE position to automatically adjust the
white balance and save the adjustment
settings in memory A or memory B.
B (ATW 1)):When this switch is set to B and
Operation >White Setting >White Switch
<B> is set to [ATW] in the setup menu, ATW is
activated.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even
when ATW is in use.
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about
three seconds.
1)ATW (Auto Tracing White balance): The white balance
of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for
varying lighting conditions.
[Note]
It may not be possible to adjust to the appropriate colors
using ATW, depending on the lighting and subject
conditions.
Examples:
ˎˎ When a single color dominates the subject, such as sky,
sea, ground, or flowers.
ˎˎ When the subject is under a light source of extremely
high or extremely low color temperature.
If execution of automatic tracing by the ATW
function takes an unacceptably long time or only
results in an inadequate effect, then execute the
AWB function.
10. Switch cover
Open this cover to use the MENU ON/OFF switch
or the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch.
11. MENU ON/OFF switch
To use the switch, open the cover.
This switch is used to display the menu on the
viewfinder screen or the test signal screen. Each
time the switch is pushed down, the menu screen
is turned on and off.
The function of this switch is the same as that
of the MENU button in the thumbnail screen
operations section.
[Note]
It is not possible to turn off the menu screen by closing the
cover.
12. MENU CANCEL/PRST (preset) /ESCAPE switch
To use the switch, open the cover.
This switch has different functions depending on
whether or not a menu is displayed.
Use the switch in the following way when the
menu is displayed.
CANCEL/PRST: Pushing this switch up to this
position after a setting is changed in the
setup menu displays the message to confirm
whether the previous settings are canceled.
Pushing this switch up to this position again
cancels the previous settings.
Pushing this switch up to this position before a
setting is changed in the setup menu or after a
setting change is canceled in the setup menu
displays the message to confirm whether the
setting is reset to the initial value. Pushing
this switch up to this position again resets the
settings to the initial value.
ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page,
which has a hierarchical structure, is opened.
0007
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
Each time the switch is pushed to this position,
the page returns to one stage higher in the
hierarchy.
Use the switch in the following way when the
menu is not displayed.
CANCEL/PRST: Each time this switch is pushed
upward, a window to confirm the menu
settings and status of the camcorder appears
on the viewfinder screen (page 12). The
window consists of several pages, which are
switched each time the switch is pushed
upward.
ESCAPE: To clear the page, push this switch down
to the OFF position.
1. Built-in speaker
The speaker can be used to monitor E-E 1) sound
during recording, and playback sound during
playback. The speaker also sounds alarms to
reinforce visual warnings (page 124).
If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE jack,
the speaker output is suppressed automatically.
LCD Monitor Side (2)
[2]
[1]
7
8
1)E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric.” In E-E mode,
video and audio signals input to the camcorder are
output after passing through internal electric circuits only.
This can be used to check input signals.
9
2. LCD monitor
Displays remaining battery capacity, remaining
media capacity, audio levels, time data, and so on.
It also allows you to check camera and playback
pictures (page 12).
You can adjust the position and angle of the LCD
monitor.
10 11 12
13. UTILITY SD card slot
Insert an SD card for saving camcorder settings.
14. ACCESS indicator
Lights up orange when the SD card is being
accessed.
1
2
3
4
5
3. WARNING indicator
Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs
(page 124).
6
13
14
15
16
17
4. ACCESS indicator
Lights up in blue when data is written to or read
from the recording media.
5. Audio control section (page 9)
6. Thumbnail screen operation section
(page 9)
7. F REV (fast reverse) button and indicator
This plays back at high speed in the reverse
direction. The playback speed changes in the order
×4  ×15  ×24 with each press of the button.
The indicator lights during high-speed playback in
0008
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
the reverse direction.
Display indication
Description
8. PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator
Press this button to view playback video images
using the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor.
The indicator lights during playback.
Press this button again during playback to pause,
outputting a still image. At this time the indicator
flashes at a rate of once per second.
Pressing the F REV or F FWD button during
playback or pause starts high speed playback in
the forward or reverse direction.
Video without
superimposed
information (MONI)
Only the video appears.
Status display
(STATUS)
Counter indications,
warnings, audio levels, and
similar information appear.
No video image appears.
9. F FWD (fast forward) button and indicator
This plays back at high speed in the forward
direction. The playback speed changes in the order
×4  ×15  ×24 with each press of the button.
The indicator lights during high-speed playback in
the forward direction.
10. PREV (previous) button
This jumps to the first frame of the current clip.
If you press this together with the F REV button,
the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded
clip on the recording media.
If you press this button twice in rapid succession,
the jump is to the first frame of the preceding
clip (or the first frame of the current clip when no
preceding clips exist).
The EXPAND button function will be supported in
a future upgrade.
14. HOLD (display hold) button
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time
data displayed in the LCD monitor. (The timecode
generator continues running.) Pressing this button
again releases the hold.
For details about the time data display, see page 12.
15. RESET/RETURN button
Resets the value shown in the time data display in
the LCD monitor. According to the settings of the
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch (page 9) and the
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch (page 9), this button
resets the display as follows.
Switch settings
RESET/RETURN button
operation
11. STOP button
DISPLAY switch:
COUNTER
Reset counter to 00:00:00:00.
12. NEXT button
This jumps to the first frame of the next clip.
If you press this together with the F FWD button,
the jump is to the last frame of the last recorded
clip on the recording media.
DISPLAY switch:
TC
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch:
SET
Reset timecode to
00:00:00:00.
Press this button to stop playback.
13. DISP SEL (display selection)/EXPAND
(expand function) button
With each press of this button, the display in the
LCD monitor changes as follows.
Display indication
Description
Video with
superimposed
information (CHAR)
The LCD monitor displays
the same text information as
the viewfinder.
Switch settings
RESET/RETURN button
operation
DISPLAY switch:
U-BIT
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch:
SET
Reset user bits data a) to
00:00:00:00.
a)Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the
media, those bits which can be used to record useful
information for the user such as scene number, shooting
place, etc.
“Setting Time Data” (page 43)
This button returns to the previous screen when
pressed during thumbnail screen display or
essence mark thumbnail screen display.
16. DISPLAY switch
This cycles the data displayed in the time data
display in the LCD monitor through the sequence
COUNTER, TC, and U-BIT (page 12).
COUNTER: Display recording/playback duration
counter.
TC: Display timecode.
U-BIT: Display user bits data.
17. BRIGHT (brightness) button
Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor
backlight.
Each press of the button selects the next setting in
the order shown in the following table. If you press
the button with the LCD monitor off, the LCD
backlight comes on in the H state.
Setting
LCD monitor backlight
H
High (select this to view the LCD
monitor outdoors in the daytime)
M
Brightness between H and L
L
Low (select this to view the LCD
monitor indoors or outdoors at night)
OFF
Off (the display is also off)
0009
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
Thumbnail screen operations section and audio control section
1
2 3 4
8
9
5
1011
1. Thumbnail indicator
This lights when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
2. THUMBNAIL button
Press this button to display the thumbnail
screen (page 72) and to carry out a thumbnail
operation.
Press once more to return to the original display.
3. SET button and arrow buttons
Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit
settings, and for thumbnail screen operations.
When the menu is displayed, press this button to
select an item or to confirm the setting change.
4. MENU button
Each press of this button turns the setup menu
display on and off.
The function of this button is the same as that of
the MENU ON/OFF switch.
5. F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/recording
run) switch
Selects the operating mode of the internal
timecode generator. The operating mode is set
as explained below, depending on the position of
the switch.
6
7
12
F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless of
whether the camcorder is recording. Use this
setting when synchronizing the timecode with
external timecode.
SET: Sets the timecode or user bits.
R-RUN: Timecode advances only during recording.
Use this setting to have a consecutive
timecode on the recording media.
8. ESSENCE MARK button
By pressing this button when a thumbnail display
is on the screen, you can view the following
thumbnail displays of the essence-marked frames
of the selected clip, depending on the item
selected in a list displayed on the screen.
All: Thumbnail display of all frames marked with
essence marks.
Rec Start: Thumbnail display of frames marked
with Rec Start marks and of the first frames of
clips (when the first frames are not marked
with Rec Start marks).
Shot Mark1: Thumbnail display of the frames
marked with Shot Mark 1.
Shot Mark2: Thumbnail display of the frames
marked with Shot Mark 2.
You can also select Shot Mark 0 and Shot Mark 3 to
Shot Mark 9.
If a clip is recorded using planning metadata that
defines names for shot mark 0 to shot mark 9, the
selection options in the list are displayed by the
defined names.
9. SHIFT button
Use this in combination with other buttons.
1/2/3/4 recording level) knobs
Adjust the audio levels to be recorded on channels
1, 2, 3, and 4 when the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2
and AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switches are set to
MANUAL.
10. PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/CLOCK switch
Selects the type of timecode to record.
PRESET: Record new timecode on the media.
REGEN: Record timecode continuous with the
existing timecode recorded on the media.
Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/RRUN switch, the camcorder operates in R-RUN
mode.
CLOCK: Record timecode synchronized to the
internal clock. Regardless of the setting of
the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the camcorder
operates in F-RUN mode.
7. AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 (audio channel 3/4
11. AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1/2
“Setting the Timecode” (page 43)
“Setting the User Bits” (page 43)
6. LEVEL CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio channel
adjustment method selection) switches
Select the audio level adjustment method for
audio channels 3 and 4.
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
adjustment method selection) switches
Select the audio level adjustment method for
audio channels 1 and 2.
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
12. AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio channel
1/2/3/4 input selection) switches
Select the audio input signals to be recorded on
audio channels 1, 2, 3 and 4.
FRONT: Audio input signals from the microphone
connected to the MIC IN connector
REAR: Audio input signals from an audio device
connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
connectors
WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the UHF
portable tuner if it is attached
000
10
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
[Note]
Handle and Memory Card Slot Side
Do not grasp this part of the camcorder when the GPS
function is in use.
3. PC connector
SxS memory card slots (page 28)
654 3
2
Used to put this camcorder into USB connection
mode and use it as an external storage device
for a computer. When a computer is connected
to this connector, every memory card inserted
in the camcorder is recognized as a drive on the
computer.
1
4. External device connector
Reserved for use in a future upgrade.
5. USB wireless LAN module connector
7
8
Connect to an IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN
Module (supplied), CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN
Adaptor (option), or combination of CBK-NA1
Network Adaptor Kit (option) and modem (option)
to enable communications with wireless LAN
devices and networks.
“Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 56)
“Connecting to the Internet” (page 59)
6. PROXY SD card slot (page 51)
Insert an SD card for recording proxy data.
9
10
11
1. ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches
You can assign a function using Operation
>Assignable Switch in the setup menu
(page 107).
Off is assigned to these switches when the
camcorder is shipped from the factory.
2. GPS module
Contains a built-in GPS module.
connector (BNC type)
This connector inputs a reference signal when the
camcorder is to be genlocked or when timecode
is to be synchronized with external equipment.
The supported reference signals vary depending
on the current system frequency as shown in the
following table.
System frequency Supported reference signals
59.94i
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
59.94P
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
50i
1080/50i, 576/50i
50P
1080/50i, 576/50i
29.97P
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
25P
1080/50i, 576/50i
23.98P
1080/23.98PsF
11. TC IN (timecode input) connector (BNC type)
To apply an external lock to the timecode of the
camcorder, input the reference timecode.
“Setting the Timecode” (page 43)
12. VIDEO OUT connector (BNC type)
Outputs video signals for monitoring.
8. Network connector
type)
To lock the timecode of an external VTR to
the timecode of this camcorder, connect this
connector to the external VTR’s timecode input
connector.
[CAUTION]
13
10. GENLOCK IN (genlock signal input)
7. (NFC) mark
A built-in NFC antenna is provided. Reserved for
use in a future upgrade.
Connects to a network via a wired LAN connection
using a LAN cable (sold separately).
12
recording unit, to output HD or SD HDMI video
and audio signals.
ˎˎ For safety, do not connect the connector for peripheral
device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this
port.
Follow the instructions for this port.
ˎˎ When you connect the LAN cable of the unit to peripheral
device, use a shielded-type cable to prevent malfunction
due to radiation noise.
“Connecting to the Internet” (page 59)
9. HDMI connector
Connect an HDMI device, such as a monitor or
13. TC OUT (timecode output) connector (BNC
000
11
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
1. TALLY (back tally) indicator (red)
Lights up during recording. It will not light if the
TALLY switch is set to OFF. It also flashes when the
WARNING indicator operates. The tally indicator on
the front of the viewfinder and the REC indication
on the viewfinder screen light or flash in the same
manner.
Tally Indicator and Connector Section
1
2
“Error/Warning System” (page 124)
2. TALLY switch
Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator function.
3. EARPHONE jack (stereo, minijack)
You can monitor the E-E sound during recording
and playback sound during playback. When an
alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound
through the earphone. Plugging an earphone into
the jack automatically cuts off the built-in speaker.
You can select monaural or stereo using
Maintenance >Audio >Headphone Out in the
setup menu.
4. AUDIO IN selector switch
3
4
5
Select the audio source you connect to the AUDIO
IN CH1/CH2 connectors.
LINE: When connecting a stereo amplifier or other
external audio signal source
AES/EBU: When connecting an external digital
audio signal source
MIC: When connecting a microphone.
6
5. +48V/OFF (+48V external power source on/
off) switch
Switch between the following settings, according
to the microphone used for audio input.
+48V: Microphone requiring external power
source (phantom power)
OFF: Microphone using internal power source or
not requiring a power source
17
8 9
10
11
6. SDI IN (SDI input) connector (BNC type)
Connector used when connecting an external HD
SDI signal source to the camcorder.
7. AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel 1 and
channel 2 input) connectors (XLR type, 3-pin,
female)
Connect to audio equipment or a microphone.
8. Bottom cover
This is provided for protecting the cables
connected to the connectors on the rear panel.
By loosening the screws which retain the cover to
the bottom of the camcorder, you can adjust the
position of the cover depending on the size and
shape of the microphone or audio cable plugs.
After adjusting the position, tighten the screws to
secure the cover.
9. AUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5-pin,
male)
Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio
channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4.
The audio signals are selected by the MONITOR
switch.
10. REMOTE connector (8-pin)
Connect a remote control unit to control the
camcorder remotely.
[Note]
Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control Unit
to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the camcorder
POWER switch.
11. SDI OUT 1/2 connectors (BNC type)
Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal (with
embedded audio). The output from this connector
can be turned on or off using Operation >Input/
Output >SDI Out1 Output or SDI Out2 Output in
the setup menu.
000
12
1. Overview
Screen Display
when recording, or displays the name of the next
clip to be recorded during recording standby.
Information Screen
1 23 4 5
12 13
9
11
10
6
8
7
1. Recording mode indicator
Indicator
Recording format
2. File format indicator
24bit
HD422 50
MPEG IMX 50
XAVC Intra
XAVC Long
3. Status display
PB: Appears during media playback.
NDF: Appears when non-drop-frame timecode is
selected.
EXT-LK: Appears when the internal timecode
generator is locked to an external signal input
to the TC IN (timecode input) connector.
HOLD: Appears when the operation mode of the
internal timecode generator is set to R-RUN
and stopped.
Indicates the audio recording or playback levels of
channels 1 to 4.
4. System frequency indicator
8. Remaining media capacity indicator
6. Audio level meters
7. Remaining battery capacity indicator
Displays the battery remaining capacity icon and
the remaining recording time.
Indicates the system frequency of video being
currently played or recorded.
Shows bar segments indicating the remaining
capacity of recording media in the slots.
5. Audio format indicator
Indicates the audio recording format or the audio
format of clip being currently played.
9. Warning indicator area
Displays warnings when trouble with recording or
moisture condensation occurs.
Indicator
Recording format
For details, see “Error/Warning System” (page 124).
16bit
HD420 HQ
DVCAM
MPEG IMX 50
10. Clip name display
Displays the name of the clip currently recording
11. Time data display
Switches displays of duration, timecode, and
user bits data, depending on the position of the
DISPLAY switch.
Displays the type of data currently shown in the
time data display, as follows.
TCG: Recorded timecode
TCR: Playback timecode
UBG: Recorded user bits
UBR; Playback user bits
CNT: Counter
DUR: Duration
CLK: Time display (when the PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch is set to CLOCK)
When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the
timecode value, the timecode is displayed in the
format shown below. When the HOLD button is
pressed again to release the hold, the timecode is
displayed in the normal format.
The three dots indicate that the timecode and
counter progress are displayed in hold mode.
12. Resolution indicator
Indicates the resolution of the output video.
13. Recording format indicator
Indicates the current recording format or the
recording format of clip being currently played.
Status Screens
The status screens allow you to check camcorder
settings and various types of status information.
When no menu is displayed, push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch up to the CANCEL/
PRST position to display the status screen. Each
push selects the next status screen, in the order
given in the table above.
The following status screens can be displayed.
Camera Status screen
Displays settings and status information related to
shooting.
Display item
Description
Gain
Gain level in dB units
Shutter
Electronic shutter status
Gamma
Gamma category and curve
White
White balance mode setting
Gain Switch
GAIN switch status
Zebra
Zebra pattern status
Iris
Iris f-stop value
Focal Length
Focal length
Focus Distance Focus distance
Depth Of Field
Depth of field
Zoom Speed
Zoom speed configured for the
lens ZOOM button
Audio Status screen
Displays settings and status information related to
audio input and output.
000
13
1. Overview: Screen Display
Display item
Description
CH 1/CH 2/CH
3/CH 4
Audio level, input source,
reference input level, and wind
noise reduction filter settings for
each channel
Video Output Status screen
Display item
Description
Display item
Description
IP Address
(Wireless)
IP address of wireless LAN
connection
Streaming
Dest. Add.
Streaming destination address
MAC Add.
(Wireless)
MAC address of device attached
the USB wireless LAN module
connector
Streaming
Dest. Port
Streaming destination port
System Status screen
Wired LAN
Wired LAN network connection
status
Number of
Distribution
Number of streaming distribution
destinations
File Transfer
File transfer progress status
Displays settings and status information related to
recording.
Wired LAN
Remote
Remote control enabled/disabled
state when connected using a
LAN cable
Transfer to:
Server name of file transfer
destination
IP Address
(Wired)
IP address of wired LAN
connection
Display item
Description
System
Frequency
System frequency
Rec Format
Recording format
Clip
Continuous
Rec
Clip Continuous Rec function on/
off setting
Title Prefix
Clip name prefix
Picture Size
Picture size
Simul Rec
Simul Rec function on/off
Rec Function
Enabled special recording format
and settings
Picture Cache
Rec
Displays settings and status information related to
video output.
Display item
Description
SDI
SDI OUT connector output
settings (output picture size,
output form, output rate,
superimposition)
HDMI
HDMI connector output settings
(output picture size, output form,
output rate, superimposition)
Video
Status
display
State
Description
Network Status 2 screen
Off
CCM not
connected
Network client
mode is off.
The Network Status 2 screen displays settings and
status information related to streaming.
Connected CCM connected Network client
mode is on, CCM is
connected, and
CCM control is
enabled.
VIDEO OUT connector output
settings (output picture size,
superimposition)
Connecting Connecting to
CCM
(disconnected)
Network Status 1 screen
The Network Status 1 screen displays settings and
status information related to the network.
Network client mode status
Display item
Description
NW Client
Mode Status
Picture cache function on/off
setting
Network client mode status
For details about the status, see
“Network client mode status”
(page 13).
CCM Name
Number
Clip name suffix
Name of the connected CCM
when using network client mode
Streaming distribution status
Gamma
Gamma category in use
Display item
Description
Streaming
Status
Proxy
Recording
Mode
Proxy data recording function on/
off setting
Setting
Network setting status
Streaming Size
Wireless
Network
Wireless network setting status
Picture size of the currently
selected streaming setting
Device Name
Name of device attached to the
USB wireless LAN module
connector
Streaming Bit
Rate
Bit rate of the currently selected
streaming setting
Streaming Type Type of the currently selected
streaming setting
Awaiting
Attempting to
connect to CCM (or
disconnecting). Wait
until connection
(disconnection) is
successful. If the
status does not
change from
“Connecting,” the
CCM address setting
may be incorrect.
Check that the
address is set
correctly.
CCM connection Network client
standby
mode is on, but the
network setting is
off. Enable the
network setting to
connect to the
CCM.
000
14
1. Overview: Screen Display
Status
display
State
Address
Error
CCM address
error
Auth.
Failed
No Inet
Access
Cert. not
Valid
Description
The host name or IP
address of the CCM
to connect may be
incorrect. Check
that the setting is
correct.
CCM user name/ The user name or
password error password used to
connect to the CCM
may be incorrect.
Check that the
setting is correct.
Internet
Cannot connect to
connection error the network. The
network settings
may be incorrect.
Check the network
settings.
CCM
certification not
valid error
The CCM certificate
is not valid. The date
setting may be
invalid. Check the
date setting.
Battery Status screen
Displays the status of the battery attached to the
camcorder.
Display item
Description
Detected
Battery
Detected type of the battery
Remaining
Remaining capacity (%)
Charge Count
Number of recharges
Capacity
Remaining capacity (Ah)
Voltage
Voltage
Manufacture
Date
Date of battery manufacture
Power Source
Power supply source
Supplied
Voltage
Supplied power source voltage
Assignable Button Status screen
Media Status screen
Displays the names of functions assigned to
assignable switches.
Displays the status of the recording media.
Display item
Description
SxSA
Remaining capacity (bar graph
and remaining time display) and
media life of media in slot A
SxSB
Remaining capacity (bar graph
and remaining time display) and
media life of media in slot B
SD Proxy
Remaining capacity (bar graph
and remaining time display) and
media life (displayed only if
available) of media in PROXY SD
card slot
SD Utility
Remaining capacity (bar graph
and remaining capacity) and
media life (displayed only if
available) of media in UTILITY SD
card slot
A
mark is displayed if the media is protected.
Viewfinder Screen
The viewfinder screen displays images during
shooting (recording or recording standby)
and playback with camcorder information
superimposed on the display.
You can toggle the display of information on/off
using the DISPLAY switch.
The information to display is linked to the settings
in Operation >Super Impose in the setup menu,
and the settings of the corresponding switches.
000
15
1. Overview: Screen Display
7
1 23 4 5 6
meters or feet.
8
9
8. Recording mode indicator
Displays the following recording operation states
of the camcorder.
10 11 12
13
15
17
19
21
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
14
16
18
20
22
23
28
1. Extender indicator
27 26 25
Displays the status of the digital extender function
and lens extender function.
EX: Appears when the lens extender function is ON
X2D: Appears when the digital extender function
(×2) is ON
X3D: Appears when the digital extender function
(×3) is ON
X4D: Appears when the digital extender function
(×4) is ON
EX2D: Appears when both the lens extender
function and digital extender function (×2) are
ON
EX3D: Appears when both the lens extender
function and digital extender function (×3) are
ON
EX4D: Appears when both the lens extender
function and digital extender function (×4) are
ON
Turn the digital extender on/off using an
assignable switch assigned with the Digital
Extender function.
24
[Note]
The digital extender cannot be turned on when Slow & Quick
Motion is enabled.
2. Zoom position indicator (with lens mounted)
Displays the zoom position of the zoom lens in the
range 0 to 99.
3. Color temperature indicator
Indicator
Meaning
Rec
During recording
Stby
Recording standby
Cont Rec
Clip continuous recording in
progress
Cont Stby
Recording standby in clip continuous
recording mode
S&Q Rec
Recording in progress in Slow &
Quick Motion mode
S&Q Stby
Recording standby in Slow & Quick
Motion mode
Rec
Recording in picture cache mode
Cache
Recording standby in picture cache
mode
Int Rec
Recording in progress in Interval Rec
mode
Int Stby
Recording standby in Interval Rec
mode
Int Stby
Recording paused in Interval Rec
mode (during pause intervals)
Sml Rec
Recording in progress in Simul Rec
mode
Displays the color temperature of the white
balance.
Sml Stby
Recording standby in Simul Rec
mode
4. Focus position indicator (with lens mounted)
Displays the focus position as a distance to the
subject (unit: meters).
CALL
Call received from external
connected device
5. Iris position indicator (with lens mounted)
Displays the iris position setting.
6. Electric color temperature filter indicator
Appears when the CC5600K function is on.
7. Depth of field indicator (serial lens mounted)
Displays the depth of field using a bar. The units
for display are set using Operation >Display On/Off
>Lens Info in the setup menu, and can be set to
Green tally is displayed when the camcorder is in
the following states.
ˎˎMaintenance >Camera Config >HD-SDI Remote
I/F is set to Green Tally in the setup menu and a
recording control signal is output from the SDI
OUT connector.
ˎˎGreen tally signal received (when a camera
adaptor is mounted on the camcorder and a
camera extension unit is connected)
9. Wireless receiver function indicator
Displays “W” when a slot-in receiver is attached to
the camcorder, and displays the reception level
for each channel that can be used by the receiver
(1ch, 2ch, or 4ch).
Normal: Displays the strength of the received
signal level by the number of white segment
indicators.
Analog receiver muting/Digital receiver error rate
warning: Displays the strength of the received
signal level by the number of gray segment
indicators.
If the received level exceeds the peak: Displays “P”
in place of the indicator. 1)
Receiver battery is low: The corresponding channel
number and indicators flash. 1)
1)When using the DWR-S02D
10. S&Q Motion (Slow & Quick) frame rate
indicator
Displays the shooting frame rate when the
camcorder is set to Slow & Quick Motion recording
mode.
11. GPS indicator (page 54)
12. Battery capacity/voltage display
Displays the following indicators according to the
type of battery power source.
Battery type
Indicator
Info battery
Battery remaining capacity
icon and remaining recording
time
Anton/Bauer
battery
Remaining battery capacity (%
indicator)
Other batteries
Input voltage
13. Recording format (picture size) indicator
Displays the picture size of clips recorded onto SxS
memory cards.
14. Recording format (system frequency and
scan method) indicator
Displays the currently configured camcorder
system frequency and the recording format scan
method.
000
16
1. Overview: Screen Display
15. Recording format (codec) indicator
Displays the format name of clips recorded onto
SxS memory cards.
18. Wired LAN connection status
Displays the wired LAN network setting and
connection status using icons.
16. Gamma indicator
State
Display the gamma setting.
Menu settings
Indicator
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Gamma
Paint >Gamma setting
Off
—
—
—
—
On
Off
—
—
Gamma
Off
On
STD
STD1 DVW
STD1
STD2 x4.5
STD2
STD3 x3.5
STD3
STD4 240M
STD4
STD5 R709
STD5
STD6 x5.0
STD6
HG1
3250G36
HG1
HG2
4600G30
HG2
HG3
3259G40
HG3
HG4
4609G33
HG4
Gamma
Gamma
Category
HG
On
On
User
Gamma
Select
User 1
User 1
User 2
User 2
User 3
User 3
User 4
User 4
User 5
User 5
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Network
Condition
Icon
Maintenance
>Network
>Wired LAN
Network
connection
status
Off
—
—
—
On
Disable
—
—
Enable
Connecting
to LAN
On
Off
Maintenance
>Network
Client Mode
>Setting
On
Streaming
state/Icon
Off
Wi-Fi Access
Point
Not
streaming
Streaming
(flashing)
Icon
Network
connection
status
—
Connecting
using Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Station
(flashing)
Error
Access point
connection
Maintenance
>Network
Client Mode
>Setting
Off
—
—
—
On
Off
Off
–
On
Off
Not
streaming
(flashing)
Connecting
using Wi-Fi
Warning
Streaming
state/Icon
—
Wi-Fi standby
(connected)
LAN
connection
error
[Note]
Icon varies
with signal
strength.
Icons are not displayed before streaming starts.
20. Wireless network status indicator
Displays the network setting and connection
status using icons.
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Network
Condition
Off
State
Maintenance
>Network
>Wireless
Network
Network
connection
status
Icon
—
—
—
Modem
Access point
connection
error
Connecting
using 3G/4G
(flashing)
Connected
using 3G/4G
3G/4G
connection
error
Streaming
Warning
17. Timecode external lock indicator
Displays timecode lock when the timecode is
input from an external source.
Maintenance
>Streaming
>Setting
State
Maintenance
>Network
>Wireless
Network
Access point
search
State
Maintenance
>Streaming
>Setting
State
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Streaming
Status
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Network
Condition
On
Connected
to LAN
19. Streaming indicator
Displays the status of streaming using icons.
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Streaming
Status
The following icons are displayed when streaming
from a CCM.
Error
21. Proxy indicator
Displays “Proxy” when proxy recording is on
(Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Setting in
the setup menu is set to On). During setup, “Proxy”
blinks. “Proxy Rec” is displayed during proxy file
recording. Displays and transfer rate (%) during
proxy file transfer. When transfer finishes,
disappears to indicate 100% transfer.
000
17
1. Overview: Screen Display
22. Network client mode indicator
Displays the status of the connection to the CCM
(PWS-100RX1 Network RX Station configured as
Connection Control Manager) using icons when
network client mode is on.
State
Operation
>Display
On/Off >NW
Client Mode
Status
Icon
Maintenance
>Network
Client Mode
>Setting
State
Off
—
—
—
On
Off
—
—
On
CCM
connected
Icon
Media state
DISPLAY switch (page 8).
Media mounting
29. SD card indicator for saving configuration
(flashing)
Recording (active)
(orange bar)
Playback (active)
(green
indicator)
data
Displays the state of the SD card (for saving
configuration data) inserted in the UTILITY SD card
slot.
Icon
Media state
—
SD card not inserted or not mounted
SD card mounted
Recording/playback (active)
Connecting to
CCM
(disconnected) (flashing)
CCM
connection
standby
CCM
connection
error
–
Mounted SD card is protected
SD card mounting
SD card (for proxy data recording) icon indicator
Icon
Media state
–
Media not inserted or not mounted
Media mounted
Media mounting
(flashing)
For details
about errors,
see
(page 13).
23. Video signal indicator
Displays the video signal in realtime as a
waveform, vectorscope, or histogram.
24. Recording media state/remaining capacity
indicator for each media slot
Displays the state and remaining capacity of the
media in SxS slot A, SxS slot B, and the PROXY SD
card slot.
SxS slot icon indicator
*SxS slot A (SxSA) example. The icons for SxS slot B are
labeled SxSB.
Icon
Media state
–
Media not inserted or not mounted
Media mounted
(orange bar
+ green
indicator)
Recording (active)
(orange bar)
The remaining recording time is displayed
numerically.
25. Audio level meter indicators
Displays the levels of audio channels 1 and 2.
26. Clip name display
Displays the name of the clip currently recording
when recording, or displays the name of the next
clip to be recorded during recording standby.
27. Focus assist indicator
Displays a detection frame (focus area marker)
indicating the area for detection of degree of
focus, and a level bar (focus assist indicator)
indicating the degree of focus within that area.
28. Time data display
Displays the remaining recording/playback
time, timecode, user bits, etc., as selected by the
34. ND filter indicator
Displays the position number of the currently
selected ND filter (page 5).
When “Electrical CC” is assigned to an assignable
switch, the position (A/B/C/D) of the electrical
CC filter is displayed on the right of the ND filter
indicator (1 to 4).
35. Gain indicator
Displays the gain setting (dB), set using the GAIN
switch, of the video amplifier.
36. Shutter mode/shutter speed indicator
Displays the shutter mode or shutter speed.
(flashing)
30. SDI output REC trigger indicator
Displays the superimposition state of the recording
command sent to the SDI connector output.
It is displayed when Maintenance >Camera Config
>HD SDI Remote I/F is set to “Characters” in the
setup menu.
31. ALAC indicator
Displays “ALAC” when the ALAC (Auto Lens
Aberration Correction) function is set to be
performed automatically.
ALAC will be performed automatically when
an ALAC-compatible lens is attached, the ALAC
function is enabled, and Maintenance >Camera
Config >ALAC is set to “Auto” in the setup menu.
32. AE (auto iris) mode indicator
Displays the current operating mode of the auto
iris function using an icon and auto iris override
level.
Icon
33. Auto focus mode indicator
Displayed when an auto focus lens is attached (not
supported in this version).
Meaning
Backlight mode
Standard mode
Spotlight mode
“Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 37)
37. White balance mode indicator
Displays the currently selected white balance
automatic adjustment memory.
ATW: ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) mode
W:A: Memory A mode
W:B: Memory B mode
W:C: Memory C mode
W:P: Preset mode
3200K: Appears when an assignable switch
assigned with Color Temp SW 3200K is on
4300K: Appears when an assignable switch
assigned with Color Temp SW 4300K is on
5600K: Appears when an assignable switch
assigned with Color Temp SW 5600K is on
6300K: Appears when an assignable switch
assigned with Color Temp SW 6300K is on
000
18
1. Overview: Screen Display
Lens Supplied with the PXW-X400KC
[Note]
The PXW-X400KC is supplied with a lens.
10. Zoom lever / zoom ring
For manual zoom adjustment, set the zoom servo/
manual switch to the MANU position, then operate
the lever/ring.
5
4
3
2
1
Always set the iris mode switch to the M (manual) position
first and then adjust the iris.
11. Focus ring
Turn this ring to adjust the focus.
6
7
8
9
10
11
1. Iris gain adjustment trimmer (page 39)
2. Iris push auto switch
When the iris mode switch is in the M (manual)
position, press this switch for instantaneous auto
iris adjustment. The iris is automatically adjusted
while the switch is held down.
3. Iris mode switch
A (auto): The iris is adjusted automatically.
M (manual): Adjust the iris with the iris ring.
4. Zoom seesaw switch
This is enabled when the zoom servo/manual
knob is in the SERVO position. Set to the W (wide
angle) position when you want wide-angle, and
set to the T (telephoto) side when you want
telephoto.
Press the switch harder for a faster zoom action, or
softer for slower zoom action.
12
13
14
15
5. RET switch
While pressed, the last few seconds recorded
appear on the viewfinder screen (Rec Review)
(page 19).
6. F.B. lock screw / F.B. adjustment ring
(page 39)
7. Positioning pin
When attaching the lens, align this pin with the
recess in the top center of lens mount on the
camcorder.
8. Macro button / macro ring
Press and hold the macro button and turn the
macro ring to adjust the focus (minimum focus
distance: 10 mm).
9. Iris ring
For manual iris adjustment, set the iris mode
switch to the M (manual) position, then turn this
ring.
12. Zoom servo / manual knob
SERVO (servo): Selects power zoom. Operate the
zoom with the zoom seesaw switch.
MANU (manual): Selects manual zoom. Operate
the zoom with the zoom lever/zoom ring.
13. Power/iris control cable
Connect to the LENS connector on the camcorder.
14. VTR switch
Use this to start and stop recording. Press once to
start recording, then press once more to stop.
15. Zoom remote control connector
Connect to an optional zoom servo controller to
enable remote control of zooming.
000
19
1. Overview: Screen Display
7. Flange focal length adjustment button
Press this to adjust the flange focal length (the
distance from the lens mounting flange plane to
the focusing plane) (page 25).
Lens Supplied with the PXW-X400KF
The PXW-X400KF is supplied with a lens.
1
2
3
4
5
6
2. FOCUS (adjustment mode) switch
A (auto): Reserved for use in a future upgrade.
M (manual): Selects manual mode for focus
adjustment with the focus ring.
3. MACRO switch
When this switch is in the ON position, macro
mode is enabled, allowing focusing over the
whole range (5 cm 1) to ∞) including the macro
range (from 5 cm 1) to 90 cm from the front of the
lens).
This operation is independent of whether the
focus adjustment mode is auto or manual.
1) At the wide-angle setting
1
2
3
4
8. Zoom control connector (8-pin)
Connect to an optional zoom servo controller to
enable remote control of zooming.
16
9. ZOOM switch
SERVO: Selects power zoom. Operate the zoom
with the power zoom lever.
MANUAL (manual): Selects manual zoom. Operate
the zoom with the zoom ring.
10
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
1. PUSH AF (auto focus) button
Reserved for use in a future upgrade.
Viewfinder
10. PUSH AUTO (instant auto iris) button
When the IRIS switch is in the M position for
manual adjustment, press this button for
instantaneous auto adjustment. The iris is
automatically adjusted while the button is held
down.
11. IRIS (adjustment mode) switch
A (auto): The iris is adjusted automatically.
M (manual): Adjust the iris with the iris ring.
12. Power zoom lever
4. Iris ring
For manual iris adjustment, set the IRIS switch to
the M (manual) position, then turn this ring.
5. Zoom ring
For manual zoom adjustment, set the ZOOM
switch to the MANUAL position, then turn this ring.
6. Focus ring
Turn this ring to adjust the focus.
When the ring is set to AF/MF mode, the faster
you turn ring the faster the focusing mechanism
operates, minimizing the amount of turning
required for focusing.
When you slide the focus ring back (toward the
camcorder), the focus mode is set to Full MF
mode, in which all focus adjustments are manual
(page 40).
This is enabled when the ZOOM switch is in the
SERVO position. Set to the W (wide angle) position
when you want wide-angle, and set to the T
(telephoto) side when you want telephoto.
Press the lever harder for a faster zoom action, or
softer for slower zoom action.
13. RET (return video) button
You can assign a function and use this as an
assignable switch (page 106).
When “Lens RET” is assigned to this button (factory
default setting), press this after recording stops
to review the last few seconds recorded on the
viewfinder screen (Rec Review) (page 45).
Press this button (single click) during recording or
playback to record a Shot Mark 1 mark, or doubleclick to record a Shot Mark 2 mark (page 47).
14. VTR button
Use this to start and stop recording. Press once to
start recording, then press once more to stop.
5
9
10
11
6
7
8
15 14 13 12
1. Connector
Connect to the VF connector (26-pin) on the
camcorder.
2. Viewfinder cable
3. Slide stopper
Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the
camcorder when it is slid from side to side.
4. Eyecup
5. Diopter adjustment ring
Turn this ring to adjust the image until it is in
sharpest focus.
6. Eyepiece
You can raise this up when required by the
situation.
7. Viewfinder barrel
You can raise this up or rotate when required by
the situation.
000
20
1. Overview: Screen Display
8. Tally indicator
Lights up when recording is started by a press
of the REC START button on this camcorder, the
VTR button on the lens, or the VTR button on the
remote control unit.
When an abnormality occurs, the tally indicator
flashes to indicate a warning.
9. PEAKING knob
Turning this knob clockwise adjusts the picture
sharpness, and makes focusing easier. This
control has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
10. CONTRAST knob
Adjusts the contrast of the screen. This control has
no effect on the output signals of the camcorder.
11. BRIGHT knob
Adjusts the brightness of the screen. This control
has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
12. TALLY switch
Controls the tally indicator located on the front of
the viewfinder.
HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is set to high.
OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.
LOW: The tally indicator brightness is set to low.
13. ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch
Controls the zebra pattern display.
ON: Display a zebra pattern.
OFF: Do not display a zebra pattern.
14. DISPLAY switch
ON: Display text information.
OFF: Do not display text information.
15. MIRROR switch
The image display on the monitor screen becomes
reversed horizontally or vertically when the
viewfinder barrel is raised up or rotated.
L/R: Reverse the image horizontally.
OFF: Do not reverse the image.
B/T: Reverse the image vertically.
16. Microphone holder
000
21
2. Preparation
Preparing a Power Supply
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and AC
adaptors listed below.
ˎˎBP-L80S Lithium-ion Battery Pack
[CAUTION]
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey the law in
the relative area or country.
For details on the battery charging procedure, refer to the battery
charger operation manual.
Note on using the battery pack
A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully
recharged.
Using AC Power
Using a Battery Pack
Press the battery pack against the back of the
camcorder, aligning the line on the side of the
battery pack with the line on the camcorder. Then
slide the battery pack down until its “LOCK” arrow
aligns with the line on the camcorder.
To detach the battery pack, pull the battery pack
up by holding the release button in.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the terminals
may become damaged.
ˎˎ During recording and playback (while the ACCESS lamp
on the right-side panel is lit in blue and the ACCESS lamp
in the card slot section is lit in orange), be careful never to
remove the battery pack.
Doing so may corrupt the data recorded on the card.
ˎˎ Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing
the battery pack.
When a BP-L80S Battery Pack is used, the
camcorder will operate continuously for
approximately 145 minutes.
[WARNING]
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
[Note]
The battery pack operating time depends on the frequency
of use of the battery pack, and the ambient temperature
when used.
Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger
suitable for each battery.
Mount an AC-DN2B/DN10 on the camcorder in
the same way as a battery pack, then connect to
the AC power supply.
000
22
2. Preparation
Attaching a Viewfinder
This section describes the viewfinder supplied with
the PXW-X400KC/PXW-X400KF models.
[CAUTION]
When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the camcorder
with the eyepiece lens facing the sun.
Direct sunlight can enter through the lens, be focused in the
viewfinder and cause fire.
2 Couple the viewfinder connector to the VF
connector (26-pin).
Viewfinder left-to-right
positioning ring
switch on the rear panel of the viewfinder to B/T.
VF connector (26-pin)
Lifting Up the Viewfinder Barrel and
Eyepiece
[Note]
A viewfinder is supplied with the PXW-X400KC/PXWX400KF models. A viewfinder for the PXW-X400 is available
separately.
You can view the LCD screen inside the viewfinder
or its mirrored image by lifting up the viewfinder
barrel or the eyepiece.
1 Push the clip on the bottom to release and flip
Attaching the Supplied Viewfinder
Viewfinder front-to-back
positioning knob
Up
[Note]
When attaching the viewfinder, take note of the following
points.
ˎˎ Be sure to the power off the camcorder before coupling
the viewfinder connector to the camcorder’s VF
connector (26-pin). If you make this connection when the
camcorder power is on, the viewfinder may not function
properly.
ˎˎ Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the
camcorder’s VF connector (26-pin). If the coupling is loose,
noise may appear on the video or the tally light may not
operate properly.
1 [1] Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right
positioning ring, [2] attach the viewfinder to
the viewfinder fitting shoe, and [3] tighten the
viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring.
Slide stopper
[3]
[2]
Left-to-right positioning
ring
[1]
You can detach the viewfinder by following the
attaching procedure in reverse order. But, when
detaching the viewfinder from the attachment
shoe, pull up the stopper.
up the viewfinder barrel.
2 It locks at the 120-degree position.
Adjusting the Viewfinder Angle
You can adjust the angle of the viewfinder.
Adjusting the Viewfinder Position
2
To adjust the viewfinder left-right position, loosen
the left-right positioning ring, and to adjust the
front-back position, loosen the front-to-back
positioning knob.
1
Reversing the display (image/text
indication) vertically
The viewfinder can be rotated as much as 180
degrees toward the direction facing the subject.
When you do this, the picture and other
information displayed in the viewfinder appear
upside down.
To restore the normal display, set the MIRROR
Normally use it in the locked position.
Although you can open it farther from the lock
position, you must return it to the closed position
to lock it at the 120-degree position again.
000
23
2 Preparation: Attaching a Viewfinder
Detaching the Viewfinder Barrel/
Eyepiece
Reversing the display (image/text
indication) horizontally
1 Push the clip on the bottom to release.
2 Flip up the viewfinder barrel.
3 Slide the knob on the top to the opposite side
By setting the MIRROR switch on the rear panel of
the viewfinder to L/R, you can reverse the picture
and other information displayed in the viewfinder
horizontally.
of the viewfinder barrel.
4 Detach the viewfinder barrel by horizontally
sliding it.
Adjust the Diopter
Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the
viewfinder image is sharpest.
Hex socket bolts
Attaching the BKW-401 Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket
By fitting an optional BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation
Bracket, you can rotate the viewfinder out of
the way so that your right leg does not hit the
viewfinder while you are carrying the camcorder.
Viewfinder slide assembly
3 Attach the BKW-401 with the supplied bolts.
Bolts supplied with the BKW-401
1 Loosen the front-to-back viewfinder
positioning levers and the front-to-back
viewfinder positioning knobs, and then pull
the viewfinder slide assembly forward.
3
4
4 Adjust the front-to-back position so that the
arm of the BKW-401 does not touch the
handle when it is raised.
Diopter adjustment ring
Adjust position so that arm does not
touch handle
You can also attach a commercially available
protection filter, close-up lens, etc. that is 52 mm
in diameter.
2
1
Adjusting the Screen
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the
viewfinder screen with the controls shown below.
Outlines: Adjust using the PEAKING knob.
Contrast: Adjust using the CONTRAST knob.
Brightness: Adjust using the BRIGHT knob.
2 Using a 2.5 mm diameter hexagonal wrench,
detach the viewfinder slide assembly.
000
24
2. Preparation
Using the Camcorder for the First Time
When using the camcorder for the first time,
configure the following settings in the menu.
For details about menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 80).
3 Turn the MENU knob to set the year, month, or
day, and then press the knob.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the remaining
digits.
Setting the Time Zone
Set the time zone for the region of use. The default
value is “UTC Greenwich.”
1 Select Operation >Time Zone >Time Zone in
the setup menu.
5 Press the SET button.
The internal clock is set to the date set in steps
2 to 4.
Next, set the time.
6 Select Maintenance >Clock Set >Time in the
setup menu.
The Time screen appears.
2 Select the time zone to use.
Setting the Date and Time of the
Internal Clock
Set the year, month, day, and day-of-week of the
internal clock.
1 Select Maintenance >Clock Set >Date in the
setup menu.
The Date screen appears.
7 Set the time in the same way as when setting
the date.
8 Press the SET button.
The time is registered in the internal clock.
To cancel the setting, press the Cancel button.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the year, month,
or day, and then press the knob.
The selected year, month, or day becomes
editable.
000
25
2. Preparation
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens
[Note]
When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable to this
connector, power off the camcorder first.
When carrying out the adjustment, use a flange
focal length adjustment chart as the subject.
Lens mount securing rubber
7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 until the proper focus is
achieved at both ends of the zoom ring.
8 When the optimum position of the F.B.
adjustment ring is achieved, tighten the F.B.
lock screw.
Attaching the Lens
This section describes how to attach the lens
supplied with the PXW-X400KF as an example.
Approx. 3 m (10 ft.)
3
1 Push the lens locking lever up and remove the
lens mount cap from the lens mount.
2 Align the center pin on the lens with the
center slot in the lens mount, and insert the
lens into the mount.
[Notes]
4 Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector.
5 Secure the lens cable with the cable clamp.
If an aberration correction lens is attached
2
1
1
The aberration correction function is activated
automatically. 1) Starting the camcorder with an
aberration correction lens may require more time
than normal because of data loading at start-up.
The lens supplied with the PXW-X400 is an
aberration correction lens. Contact a Sony sales or
service representative for information about other
aberration correction lenses.
1) The aberration correction function does not operate if
Maintenance >Camera Config >ALAC in the setup menu
is set to Off.
3 Holding the lens in place, push the lens
locking lever down to lock the lens.
[Caution]
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off
while the camcorder is being used. This could
cause a serious accident. Make sure the lens is
firmly locked. It is recommended that the lens
mount securing rubber be put on the lens
locking lever as illustrated below.
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length
If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you
zoom from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the
flange focal length (the distance from the plane
of the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane,
also called flange-back).
Make this adjustment just one time after mounting
or changing the lens.
ˎˎ If you use a subject with insufficient contrast, or move the
camcorder or subject during adjustment, this will cause
an adjustment error.
ˎˎ Place the subject (the flange focal length adjustment
chart) so that it appears at the center of the screen at the
telephoto end. Arrange it so that no nearby object (no
object closer to the camera than the chart) enters the
screen at the wide-angle end.
Adjusting the flange focal length on the lens
supplied with the PXW-X400KC
1 Place a subject (Siemens star chart, for
example) 3 m (10 ft) in front of the camera.
2 Open the iris.
The depth-of-field is reduced when the iris is
open, making adjustment easier.
3 Set the lens zoom to T (telephoto).
4 Adjust the focus on the subject.
5 Set the lens zoom to W (wide angle).
6 Loosen the F.B. lock screw on the lens, and
turn the F.B. adjustment ring to adjust the
focus.
Adjusting the flange focal length on the lens
supplied with the PXW-X400KF
1 Place a subject (Siemens star chart, for
example) 3m (10 ft) in front of the camera.
2 Open the iris.
The depth-of-field is reduced when the iris is
open, making adjustment easier.
3 Set the FOCUS switch to the M (manual)
position, the focus ring to the AF/MF position,
and the ZOOM switch to the SERVO position.
4 Press and hold the F.f. button.
5 When the zoom automatically moves to the T
(telephoto) position, adjust the focus, and
press the F.f. button.
6 When the zoom automatically moves to the W
(wide angle) position, adjust the focus, and
press the F.f. button.
If the flange focal length adjustment is not
successful
Check the subject and lighting conditions, and
repeat the adjustment.
000
26
2. Preparation
Preparing the Audio Input System
Connecting a Microphone to the MIC
IN Connector
Attach the supplied microphone to the
microphone holder of the supplied viewfinder.
1 Loosen the screw and open the microphone
On how to attach the microphone, refer to the operation
manual for the microphone.
3 Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN
connector, then set the AUDIO IN switch for
the channel on which you want to record the
audio from this microphone to FRONT.
Attaching a Digital Wireless Receiver
To use a Sony digital wireless microphone system,
power the camcorder off and then attach the
digital wireless receiver.
ˎˎDWR-S02D Digital Wireless Receiver
For details about attaching a digital wireless receiver, refer to the
instruction manual of each product.
holder clamp.
Microphone holder clamp
Connecting Line Input Audio
Equipment
[1]
[2]
1 Connect the audio output connector of the
4 Secure the microphone cable with the cable
2 Place the microphone in the microphone
holder.
[1] Place the microphone in the holder so that
“UP” is at the top.
[2] Close the microphone holder.
[3] Tighten the screw.
[2]
clamp.
[3]
You can connect up to two monaural
microphones to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
connectors, using an optional CAC-12 Microphone
Holder.
Supported microphones: ECM-674/678 electret
condenser microphone
For details about attaching the microphone holder and
microphone, refer to the instruction manual of each product.
[1]
audio equipment that supplies the line input
signal to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2
connector.
2 Set the AUDIO IN selector for the channel to
Connecting Microphones to the
AUDIO IN Connectors
[4]
which the audio signal source is connected to
LINE.
XLR connection automatic detect function
ˎˎWith the XLR connection automatic detection
function switched off (the factory default
setting): Set the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 switch
to REAR for the channels to which the audio
equipment is connected.
ˎˎWith the XLR connection automatic detection
function switched on: When a cable is
connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2
connector, the input from that connector is
automatically selected for audio recording,
regardless of the setting of the AUDIO IN CH1/
CH2 switch.
The XLR connection automatic detection function
can be switched on/off using Maintenance >Audio
>Rear XLR Auto in the setup menu.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] Place the microphone in the holder so that
“UP” is at the top.
[2] Close the microphone holder.
[3] Tighten the screw.
000
27
2. Preparation
Attaching and Adjusting Peripheral Devices
[Note]
Mounting on a Tripod
1 Attach the optional VCT-14/U14 Tripod
Adaptor to the tripod.
The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position
even after the camcorder is removed. If this happens, press
the red button and move the lever as shown above until
the pin returns to the stowed position. If the pin remains
in the engaged position, you will not be able to mount the
camcorder on the tripod adaptor.
Attaching the Shoulder Strap
1,3
1 Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap fitting.
Pull up the strap to lock the fitting.
2 Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.
Connecting a Video Light
Slide the camcorder forward along the
groove in the adaptor until it clicks.
3 Make sure that the camcorder is securely
attached by moving it back and forth.
To remove the camcorder from the tripod
attachment, hold down the red button and pull
the lever in the direction of the arrow.
With this camcorder, you can use the Anton Bauer
Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light (powered by
12 V with maximum power consumption of 50 W).
ˎˎIf you connect the video light to the LIGHT
connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT
switch to AUTO, you can turn the light on and
off automatically as you start and stop recording
on this camcorder.
ˎˎThe output of the LIGHT connector on the
camcorder is regulated to 12 V even when the
camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power
(through the DC IN connector or battery pack).
The brightness or color temperature of the light
will not change in response to voltage increase.
Clip
2 Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap fitting
on the other side of the grip in the same way.
To remove the shoulder strap, refer to the
following diagram.
Press here and pull in the direction shown
by the arrow to release.
[Notes]
[Note]
The accessory shoe on the camcorder is of the 1/4-inch
tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with a slide-type
shoe, use the supplied cold shoe kit.
Lever
Shoulder pad
ˎˎ Do not connect video lights with power consumption of
50 W or greater.
ˎˎ The brightness or color temperature of the light will
change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN
connector or from the battery pack) is less than 12 V.
To attach a video light, fit the video light to
the accessory shoe on the camcorder grip,
and connect the video light cable to the LIGHT
connector.
Red button
2
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position
You can slide the shoulder pad back and forth
within a 40 mm range. This adjustment helps
you get the best balance for shooting with the
camcorder on your shoulder.
1 Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder
pad to unlock the shoulder pad.
2 Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward
until it is in the most convenient position.
3 Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad
in the selected position.
000
28
2. Preparation
Handling SxS Memory Cards
This camcorder records video and audio on SxS
memory cards (not supplied) loaded into one or
both of its memory card slots.
You can use the camcorder with the following
devices to make recordings.
ˎˎMEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor (SDXC only
supported) or QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard
Adaptor
About SxS Memory Cards
SxS memory cards
Use Sony SxS memory cards (SxS PRO or SxS-1)
with this camcorder.
SxS PRO+ series
SxS PRO series
SxS-1 series
The memory cards listed above comply with the
ExpressCard memory card standard.
ˎˎSxS, SxS PRO, and SxS-1 are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
ˎˎThe ExpressCard label and logo are the
property of the Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association (PCMCIA) and
are licensed to Sony Corporation. All other
trademarks and trade names are the property of
their respective owners.
Slot A
Slot B
Slot status
Lights in
green
Standby (the loaded SxS memory
card is ready for recording or
playback)
Not lit
No SxS memory card is loaded.
An unusable card is loaded.
An SxS memory card is loaded, but
the other slot is selected.
2 Press the EJECT button again to eject the card.
[Note]
When you press the EJECT button, take care not to
impede the SxS memory card. If the movement of
the SxS memory card is impeded, the lock may fail to
release.
[Note]
Make sure to insert the SxS card in the correct
orientation. Hold the card with the arrow on one side
facing the direction shown in the diagram, and then
insert the card.
The ACCESS indicator lights in orange, and
then lights in green to indicate that the
memory card is usable.
Ejecting SxS Memory Cards
1 Open the cover, and then press the EJECT
button to release the lock and extract the
button.
[Note]
Press the button once
to release the lock.
Selecting the SxS Memory Card to
Use
3 Close the cover.
ACCESS indicator status
Card slots A and B each have an ACCESS indicator
that indicate the slot status.
Slot A access indicator
Slot B access indicator
Inserting SxS Memory Cards
1 Slide the cover to the left to open.
2 Insert an SxS memory card into a card slot.
Indicator
Indicator
Slot status
Lights in
orange
Accessing the SxS memory card
(lights during data reading and
writing)
Data integrity cannot be guaranteed if you power the
camcorder off or remove a memory card while the card
is being accessed. All data recorded on the card may be
discarded. Always make sure that the ACCESS indicator is
lit green or not lit before you power the camcorder off or
remove a memory card.
When SxS memory cards are loaded in both slot A
and slot B, you can press the SLOT SELECT button
to select the SxS memory card to use.
When the remaining recording time on the
recording SxS memory card falls below 60
seconds, the remaining capacity indicator for
the corresponding media slot flashes on the
viewfinder screen to indicate that the camcorder
will switch SxS memory cards soon.
Subsequently, the camcorder switches
automatically to the other card when the selected
card becomes full, and recording continues.
000
29
2 Preparation: Handling SxS Memory Cards
[Note]
The SLOT SELECT button is disabled during playback. The
memory cards are not switched even if you press the button.
Button operations are enabled when a thumbnail screen
(page 72) is displayed.
Formatting (Initializing) SxS Memory
Cards
If formatting fails
A format operation may fail because the SxS
memory card is write protected, or because it is
not the type of card specified for use with this
camcorder.
In this case, an error message appears. Follow the
instructions in the error message and exchange
the card for an SxS memory card that can be used
with this camcorder.
[Notes]
When an unformatted SxS memory card or an SxS
memory card formatted in another specification is
inserted, a message notifying you that the media
has a different file system appears. In this case,
format the memory card in the following way.
SxS memory cards are formatted in exFAT mode or
FAT mode by factory default.
[Note]
SxS memory cards must be formatted on an XDCAM device
that supports the exFAT or UDF file system or on this
camcorder. Cards in other formats cannot be used.
1 Select Operation >Format Media in the setup
menu.
2 Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B).
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to
format the card appears.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is displayed, and
the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
ˎˎ Formatting a memory card erases all data, including
recorded video data and setup files.
ˎˎ Use the format function of this camcorder to format SxS
memory cards for use on this camcorder. The formats of
cards formatted on other devices are not recognized as
valid formats, making it necessary to format them again
on this camcorder.
Checking the Remaining Recording
Time
You can check the remaining capacity of the SxS
memory cards loaded in the two slots by checking
the recording media remaining capacity indicator
in the viewfinder.
The remaining recording time is calculated from
the remaining capacity of the media in each slot
and the current video format (recording bit rate),
and is displayed in units of minutes.
You can check the remaining capacity on a bar
graph by displaying the Media Status screen
(page 14).
[Note]
A
mark appears when a memory card is write protected.
When to exchange SxS memory cards
ˎˎThe warning message “Media Near Full” appears,
the WARNING indicator and the REC indication
on the viewfinder screen flash, and the buzzer
sounds when the total remaining recording
time of the two memory cards falls to five
minutes during recording.
Exchange one of the cards for media with
available recording capacity.
ˎˎIf you continue recording, the message “Media
Full” appears and recording stops when the
total remaining recording time falls to 0.
[Note]
About up to 600 clips can be recorded on one SxS memory
card.
The display of remaining recording time changes to “0”
and the message “Media Full” appears when the clip limit is
reached.
Restoring SxS Memory Cards
If for any reason an error should occur in a memory
card, the card must be restored before use.
When you load an SxS memory card that needs to
be restored, a message appears in the viewfinder
to ask whether you want to restore it.
To execute the restore, turn the MENU knob to
select [Execute], and then press the knob.
The restoration starts.
During restoration, a message is displayed, and the
ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When restoration ends, a completion message
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
If restoration fails
ˎˎWrite protected SxS memory cards and cards on
which memory errors have occurred cannot be
restored. A warning message appears for such
cards. Follow the instructions in the message
and unprotect the card or replace it with
another card.
ˎˎSxS memory cards on which memory errors
have occurred may become usable if they are
reformatted.
ˎˎIn some cases, some clips can be restored while
others cannot. The restored clips can be played
normally.
ˎˎIf the message “Could not Restore Some Clips”
keeps appearing after repeated attempts at
restoration, it may be possible to restore the SxS
memory card with the following procedure.
[1] Use the application software (page 132)
to copy the required clips to another SxS
memory card.
[2] Format the unusable SxS memory card on
the camcorder.
[3] Copy the required clips back to the newly
formatted SxS memory card.
000
30
2. Preparation
Handling SD Cards for Saving Configuration Data
The following SD cards can be used for saving
configuration data.
Checking the Remaining Capacity
SDHC memory cards* (Speed Class: 4 to 10, nonUHS, Capacity: 2 to 32 GB)
SD memory cards* (Capacity: up to 2 GB)
You can check the remaining capacity on an SD
card on the Media Status screen (page 14).
To use an SD card formatted on the camcorder in
the slot of another device, make a backup of the
card, then reformat the card in the device to be
used.
* Referred to as “SD cards” in this manual.
Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards
SD cards must be formatted the first time they are
used in the camcorder.
SD cards for use in the camcorder should be
formatted using the format function of the
camcorder. If a message appears when the SD card
is inserted into the camcorder, format the SD card.
1 Select Operation >Format Media >SD Card
(Utility) in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to
format the card appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is displayed, and
the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
[Note]
Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card. The card
cannot be restored.
000
31
2. Preparation
Using a Media Adaptor
[Notes]
ˎˎ For professional applications, the use of other media will
not provide the same high reliability and durability that is
obtained using SxS memory cards.
ˎˎ Not all memory cards are guaranteed to work with this
camcorder. For compatible memory cards, contact your
Sony dealer.
XQD Memory Cards
By using an optional QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard
Adaptor, you can insert an XQD memory card into
the SxS memory card slot and use it instead of an
SxS memory card.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
[Note]
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the
The following SDXC cards are supported.
SDXC memory cards (SD speed class: Class 10)
press the knob.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to
format the card appears.
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is displayed, and
the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
[Note]
For details about using a QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adaptor,
refer to the instruction manual supplied with the adaptor.
Formatting an XQD memory card erases all data on the card,
including protected video. The data cannot be restored.
[Notes]
Connection between the camcorder and a
computer
ˎˎ High-speed playback may not be properly achieved with
an XQD memory card.
ˎˎ Slow motion recording using the Slow & Quick Motion
recording function cannot be used with an XQD memory
card.
Formatting (initializing)
XQD memory cards must be formatted the first
time they are used in the camcorder.
XQD memory cards for use in the camcorder
should be formatted using the format function
of the camcorder. If a message appears when the
XQD memory card is inserted into the camcorder,
format the XQD memory card.
If an unformatted XQD memory card or an XQD
memory card that was formatted in a different
specification is inserted, a message asking for
confirmation to format media or a message
notifying you that the media has a different file
system appears.
1 Select Operation >Format Media in the setup
menu.
2 Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B).
Insert the recorded XQD memory card into a slot
in the camcorder, and connect the camcorder to a
computer using a USB cable.
To use a memory card formatted on the
camcorder in the slot of another device
First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the
card in the device to be used.
Do not use SDXC cards at the same time as other memory
cards. If a mix of cards are used at the same time, the
camcorder cannot switch cards when the media becomes
full.
For details about using an MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor, refer to
the instruction manual supplied with the adaptor.
[Notes]
ˎˎ High-speed playback may not be properly achieved with
an SDXC card.
ˎˎ Slow motion recording using the Slow & Quick Motion
recording function cannot be used with an SDXC card.
Formatting (initializing)
SDXC cards must be formatted the first time they
are used in the camcorder.
SDXC cards for use in the camcorder should
be formatted using the format function of the
camcorder. If a message appears when the SDXC
card is inserted into the camcorder, format the
SDXC card.
If an unformatted SDXC card or an SDXC card
that was formatted in a different specification is
inserted, a message asking for confirmation to
format media or a message notifying you that the
media has a different file system appears.
Format the card using the following procedure.
1 Select Operation >Format Media in the setup
menu.
SDXC Cards
By using an optional MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor,
you can insert an SDXC card into an SxS memory
card slot and use it instead of an SxS memory card
for recording and playback.
2 Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B).
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to
format the card appears.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is displayed, and
the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
[Note]
Formatting an SDXC card erases all data on the card,
including protected video. The data cannot be restored.
Connection between the camcorder and a
computer
Insert the recorded SDXC card into a slot in the
camcorder, and connect the camcorder to a
computer using a USB cable.
To use a memory card formatted on the
camcorder in the slot of another device
First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the
card in the device to be used.
XQD is a registered trademark of Sony
Corporation.
000
32
3. Settings and Adjustments
Format Settings
You can set the recording mode, system frequency, and video format using Operation >Format in the
setup menu.
Switching the Video Format
For details about menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 80).
Refer to “Video Formats” (page 32) as required when switching the video format.
Selecting the Recording Mode
1 Select Operation >Format >Rec Format in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to change the video format, and press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
You can select exFAT or UDF recording mode.
[Note]
3 Select [Execute] to execute, or select [Cancel] to cancel, and then press the MENU knob.
UDF support is planned for a future release.
1 Select Operation >Format >File System in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select exFAT or UDF, and press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Select [Execute] to execute, or select [Cancel] to cancel, and then press the MENU knob.
The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing.
Video Formats
The following recording formats can be selected for different combinations of video resolution and
system frequency.
System frequency
59.94/50
Switching the System Frequency
You can switch the system frequency as required. The camcorder will reboot automatically after
switching.
[Notes]
ˎˎ The system frequency cannot be changed during recording/playback or while the thumbnail screen is displayed.
ˎˎ After switching between 29.97 and 59.94 or between 25 and 40, the camcorder does not reboot automatically.
1 Select Operation >Format >Frequency in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the system frequency, and press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Select [Execute] to execute, or select [Cancel] to cancel, and then press the MENU knob.
Video format
(Operation >Format >Rec Format in setup menu)
XAVC-I 1080i
XAVC-I 720P
XAVC-L 50 1080P
XAVC-L 50 1080i
XAVC-L 50 720P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080i
XAVC-L 25 1080i
HD422 50 1080i a)
HD422 50 720P a)
HQ 1920 × 1080i a)
HQ 1440 × 1080i a)
HQ 1280 × 720P a)
MPEG IMX 50 a)
DVCAM a)
Picture size
1920 × 1080
1280 × 720
1920 × 1080
1920 × 1080
1280 × 720
1920 × 1080
1280 × 720
1920 × 1080
1440 × 1080
1280 × 720
720 × 486/720 × 576
720 × 480/720 × 576
000
33
3. Settings and Adjustments: Format Settings
System frequency
29.97/25/23.98
Video format
(Operation >Format >Rec Format in setup menu)
XAVC-I 1080P
XAVC-L 50 1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P a)
HD422 50 720P a)
HQ 1920 × 1080P a)
Picture size
1920 × 1080
1920 × 1080
1280 × 720
1920 × 1080
a) exFAT and UDF files systems are supported. Only exFAT is supported for other options.
Operation menu
Format
Frequency
29.97
1920 × 1080P
1280 × 720P
23.98
[Note]
Input/Output
Rec Format (codec omitted)
1920 × 1080P
UDF support is planned for a future release.
1280 × 720P
SDI OUT Connector and HDMI Output Connector Output Formats
50
1920 × 1080P
The signals that can be output from the SDI OUT connector and HDMI output connector are shown in the
following table according to the Operation >Format setting in the setup menu.
Operation menu
Format
Frequency
59.94
1920 × 1080i
Input/Output
Rec Format (codec omitted)
1920 × 1080P
1920 × 1080i
1440 × 1080i
1280 × 720P
720 × 480i
Output Format
SDI
HDMI
1920 × 1080P (Level A)
1920 × 1080P
1920 × 1080P (Level B)
No signal
1920 × 1080i
1920 × 1080i
720 × 486i
720 × 480i
1920 × 1080i
1920 × 1080i
720 × 486i
720 × 480i
1920 × 1080i
1920 × 1080i
720 × 486i a)
720 × 480i a)
1280 × 720P
1280 × 720P
720 × 486i
720 × 480i
720 × 486i
720 × 480i
No signal
720 × 480P
1440 × 1080i
1280 × 720P
720 × 576i
25
1920 × 1080P
1280 × 720P
Output Format
SDI
HDMI
1920 × 1080PsF
1920 × 1080i
720 × 486i
720 × 480i
1280 × 720P
1280 × 720P
720 × 486i
720 × 480i
1920 × 1080PsF
No signal
1920 × 1080i (2-3PD)
1920 × 1080i (2-3PD)
720 × 486i (2-3PD)
720 × 480i (2-3PD)
1280 × 720P (2-3PD)
1280 × 720P (2-3PD)
720 × 486i (2-3PD)
720 × 480i (2-3PD)
1920 × 1080P (Level A)
1920 × 1080P
1920 × 1080P (Level B)
No signal
1920 × 1080i
1920 × 1080i
720 × 576i
720 × 576i
1920 × 1080i
1920 × 1080i
720 × 576i
720 × 576i
1920 × 1080i
1920 × 1080i
720 × 576i
720 × 576i a)
a)
1280 × 720P
1280 × 720P
720 × 576i
720 × 576i
720 × 576i
720 × 576i
No signal
720 × 576P
1920 × 1080PsF
1920 × 1080i
720 × 576i
720 × 576i
1280 × 720P
1280 × 720P
720 × 576i
720 × 576i
a) Not supported when proxy recording and wireless LAN connection function is on.
000
34
3. Settings and Adjustments: Format Settings
Operation menu
VIDEO Connector Output Formats
Format
The signals that can be output from the VIDEO connector are shown in the following table according to
the Operation >Format setting in the setup menu.
Operation menu
Frequency
Rec Format (codec omitted)
1920 × 1080P
59.94
1920 × 1080P
Composite
ON
1920 × 1080i
1440 × 1080i
HD Y
HD Y
Composite
1440 × 1080i
720 × 480i
29.97
1920 × 1080P
Composite
HD Sync a)
Composite
Composite c)
Composite
HD Y
HD Y
1920 × 1080P
1280 × 720P
HD Y
HD Y b)
Composite
23.98
—
HD Sync a)
Composite
1280 × 720P
HD Y
720 × 576i
HD Y
Composite
1280 × 720P
1280 × 720P
HD Y b)
HD Y
HD Y/HD Sync
HD Y
Composite
HD Y
HD Y b)
Composite
HD Y b)
25
1920 × 1080P
—
HD Sync a)
Composite
HD Sync a)
Composite
Composite c)
Composite
HD Y
HD Y
Composite
1280 × 720P
HD Y
HD Y
Composite
HD Y
HD Y
HD Y
Composite
HD Y
1920 × 1080i
HD Y
HD Y
HD Y
Composite
ON
HD Y
Proxy recording/Wireless LAN connection function
OFF
Proxy recording/Wireless LAN connection function
OFF
50
VIDEO OUT signal format
Rec Format (codec omitted)
Format
Frequency
VIDEO OUT signal format
HD Y
HD Y
b)
Composite
HD Y b)
a) 1080i sync signal output.
b)1080PsF sync signal output.
c) Character information (superimposed) turns on/off in conjunction with the SDI OUT2 connector output on/off setting.
000
35
3. Settings and Adjustments
Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance
To ensure excellent image quality when using this
camcorder, conditions may require that both the
black balance and the white balance be adjusted.
Black balance and white balance adjustment
values that are automatically set by the camcorder
and the various settings are stored in the
camcorder memory and retained even when the
power is turned off.
Adjusting the Black Balance
The black balance will require adjustment in the
following cases.
ˎˎWhen the camcorder is used for the first time
ˎˎWhen the camcorder has not been used for a
long time
ˎˎWhen the camcorder is used under conditions
in which the surrounding temperature has
changed greatly
ˎˎWhen the GAIN selector (L/M/H/Turbo) values
have been changed with Operation >Gain
Switch in the setup menu.
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black
balance when using the camcorder after it has
been off.
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are
performed in the following order: black set and
black balance. Manual black balance adjustment
can be selected from the setup menu.
Automatic black balance adjustment is disabled in
the following cases.
ˎˎDuring recording
ˎˎDuring special recording modes
ˎˎWhen the shutter mode is SLS
1 Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.
2 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLACK and
release the switch.
The message “Executing…” appears during
execution, and changes to “OK” when the
adjustment finishes.
Adjustment values are saved to memory
automatically.
[Notes]
ˎˎ During the black balance adjustment, the iris is
automatically closed.
ˎˎ During the black balance adjustment, the gain selection
circuit is automatically activated so you may see flickering
on the viewfinder screen, but this is not a fault.
If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be
made
If the black balance adjustment cannot be
completed normally, an error message will appear
for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen.
Error message
Meaning
NG: Iris not Closed
The lens iris did not close;
adjustment was impossible.
ˎˎWHITE BAL switch: A or B 1)
1) Adjustment values are saved to memory B only when
Operation >White Setting >White Switch<B> in the
setup menu is set to Memory.
2 Set the FILTER knob to suit the lighting
conditions as follows.
3 Place a white test card under the same lighting
conditions as the subject to be shot and zoom
in on it.
Alternatively, any white object such as a cloth
or a wall can be used.
The absolute minimum white area is as
follows.
Rectangle centered on the screen
The lengths of the sides are 70% of the length
and width of the screen. 10% or more of the
surface area of the image within the rectangular
area must be white.
If any of the above error messages is displayed,
retry the black balance adjustment.
If the error message occurs again, an internal
check is necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to the
Maintenance Manual.
[Note]
If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS
connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris. If this
happens, the black balance will be incorrect.
Adjusting the White Balance
Always readjust the white balance when the
lighting conditions change.
1 Set the switches and selectors as shown
below.
ˎˎGAIN switch: L (set to a gain value that is as
small as possible)
ˎˎOUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM
[Note]
Make sure there are no bright spots in the rectangle.
4 Adjust the lens iris.
Manually adjusted lens: set the iris to an
appropriate setting.
Lens with automatic iris: set the automatic/
manual switch on the lens to automatic.
in the memory selected in step 1 (A or B).
[Note]
If the camcorder has a zoom lens with an automatic iris,
the iris may hunt 1) during the adjustment. To prevent
this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as IG, IS, or S) on
the lens.
1) Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of
the image, resulting from repeated response to
automatic iris control.
For details, refer to the lens operation manual.
If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot
be made
If the white balance adjustment cannot be
completed normally, an error message will appear
for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen.
Error message
Meaning
NG: Low Light
The white video level is too
low. Either open the lens iris or
increase the gain.
NG: Timeout
Adjustment could not be
completed within the standard
number of attempts.
NG: High Light
The white video level is too
high. Either stop down the lens
iris or change the ND filter.
NG: Color Temp.
High
The color temperature of the
subject lighting is too high,
and could not be adjusted.
Adjust the color temperature
of the lighting, then update
memory.
NG: Color Temp.
Low
The color temperature of the
subject lighting is too low, and
could not be adjusted. Adjust
the color temperature of the
lighting, then update memory.
NG: Out of Range
Value could not be adjusted
because the difference
between the current value and
reference value exceeds the
adjustment range.
5 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to WHITE and
then release the switch.
The message “Executing…” appears during
execution, and changes to “OK: (color
temperature of subject)” when the adjustment
finishes.
The adjustment values are saved automatically
000
36
3. Settings and Adjustments: Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance
Error message
Meaning
NG: Poor White
Area
The white surface of the
subject is too narrow, and
could not be adjusted.
If any of the above error messages is displayed,
retry the white balance adjustment. If the error
message occurs again, an internal check is
necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to the
Maintenance Manual.
If you have no time to adjust the white balance
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
Changing the color temperature when the ND
filter is switched
You can assign electrical CC (color correction)
filters to ND filters (page 5) allowing you to
change the color temperature automatically when
the ND filter is switched.
1 Set Maintenance >White Filter >ND Filter C.
Temp to On in the setup menu (page 100).
2 To assign an electrical CC filter to FILTER knob
position number 1, select [ND FLT C.
Temp<1>]. To assign it to positions 2 to 4,
select [ND FLT C.Temp<2-4>].
3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired
color temperature.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required.
Switching electrical CC filters with an assignable
switch
You can assign the function that switches between
electrical CC filters to an assignable switch. This
allows you to switch between color temperatures
(3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) that have been
assigned using up to four positions (A to D) with
each press of the assignable switch.
Regardless of assignments to assignable
switches, you can also switch between the color
temperatures assigned to each position from a
RM-B150/B170/B750 Remote Control Unit.
1 Select Maintenance >White Filter in the setup
menu.
2 Select the position to which to assign a CC
filter by selecting one of [Electrical CC<A>] to
[Electrical CC <D>], and then turn the MENU
knob to select the desired color temperature.
Select “-----” with Electrical CC <C> or <D>
selected.
When the assignable switch is pressed, the
setting for that position is not displayed. For
example, if “-----” is set for one position, then
switching between the remaining three
positions is carried out.
3 Repeat step 2 as required.
4 Assign the electrical CC filter switching
function (ELECTRICAL CC) to an assignable
switch (page 107).
White balance memory
Values stored in memory are held until the white
balance is next adjusted, even if the camcorder
power is turned off.
The camcorder has two white balance memories,
A and B. You can automatically save adjustment
values for each ND filter in the memory that
corresponds to the WHITE BAL switch setting (A
or B). The camcorder has four built-in ND filters,
allowing you to save a total of eight adjustment
values (4×2). However, the contents of the
memories are not linked to ND filter settings in the
following cases.
ˎˎWhen the number of memories allocated to
each of A and B is limited to one by setting
Operation >White Setting >Filter White Memory
in the setup menu to Off.
ˎˎWhen the electrical CC filter switching function
has been assigned to an assignable switch,
or when a remote control unit has been
connected. (In these cases, the contents of
white balance memory are linked to electrical
CC filter positions (A to D).)
Also, when Operation >White Setting >White
Switch<B> in the setup menu is set to [ATW
(Auto Tracing White Balance)], and the WHITE BAL
switch is set to B, the ATW function is activated
to automatically adjust the white balance of the
picture being shot for varying lighting conditions.
000
37
3. Settings and Adjustments
Setting the Electronic Shutter
shutter speeds that can be set varies depending
on whether the Slow & Quick Motion (S&Q)
function is on or off.
Shutter Modes
The shutter modes that can be used with the
electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can
be selected are listed below.
System
frequency
Shutter speed (unit: Hz)
S&Q: Off
S&Q: On
59.94i
60.00 to 7000
—
Standard mode
59.94P
60.00 to 8000
60.00 to 8000
29.97P
30.00 to 8000
30.00 to 8000
Select this mode for shooting fast-moving subjects
with little blurring.
You can set the shutter speed in one of two
shutter modes: Speed mode, in which the speed
is set in seconds, and Angle mode, in which the
speed is set in degrees.
23.98P
23.99 to 6000
30.03 to 6000
50i
50.00 to 7000
—
50P
50.00 to 7000
50.00 to 7000
25P
25.02 to 7000
30.00 to 7000
SLS (slow speed shutter) mode
Speed mode
System
Shutter speed (unit: seconds)
frequency
59.94i
59.94P
50i
50P
1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000
29.97P
1/40 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
25P
1/33 , 1/50 , 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
23.98P
1/32 a), 1/48 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/96, 1/100,
1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,
1/2000
a)
a)
a) This speed cannot be selected when the camcorder is in
Slow & Quick Motion mode and Operation >Rec Function
>Frame Rate in the setup menu is set to a value that is
greater than the system frequency.
Angle mode
180°, 90°, 45°, 22.5°, 11.25°
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode
Select this mode for obtaining images with no
horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects
such as monitor screens.
As shown in the following tables, the range of
This mode is used to shoot subjects with low
illumination. The number of accumulated frames
shot when using the slow speed shutter function
can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16 using Operation
>Slow Shutter >Number of Frames in the setup
menu.
[Notes]
ˎˎ SLS mode cannot be used when the camcorder is in Slow
& Quick Motion mode.
ˎˎ It is not possible to turn the SLS mode on or off, or change
the number of accumulated frames when recording.
Switching between Speed mode and Angle mode
1 Select Operation >Shutter >Mode in the setup 1 Set the shutter mode to ECS (see the previous
menu.
item).
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Speed] or
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired
Setting the shutter mode and shutter speed
(standard mode)
Setting the shutter speed (SLS mode)
[Angle], and then press the knob.
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained
even when the camcorder power is turned off.
1 Push the SHUTTER switch from ON to SELECT.
The current shutter setting indication appears
in the viewfinder for about three seconds.
2 Before the shutter setting in step 1 disappears,
push the SHUTTER switch down to SELECT
again. Repeat this step until the desired mode
or speed appears.
When all modes and speeds are displayed, the
display changes in the following order.
Speed Mode (with system frequency 59.94i)
ECS Mode
Setting the Shutter Mode and Shutter
Speed
[Notes]
ˎˎ When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as the
shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of field.
ˎˎ The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on the
current system frequency.
Setting the shutter speed (ECS mode)
[Note]
Depending on the frame rate setting (page 48), some
shutter speeds cannot be selected in Slow & Quick Motion
mode. These speeds are replaced by the slowest selectable
shutter speed.
Example: If you perform Slow & Quick Motion
shooting with the frame rate set to 60 and the
video format to HQ1280/29.97P:
The shutter speed is indicated as follows.
ˎˎSlow & Quick Motion mode: Off
1/401/501/601/100…
ˎˎSlow & Quick Motion mode: On
1/601/601/601/100…
frequency or number of frames.
1 Select Operation >Slow Shutter >Setting in the
setup menu and set the shutter mode to On.
2 Select Operation >Slow Shutter >Number of
Frames in the setup menu and select the
desired number of frames.
000
38
3. Settings and Adjustments
Setting Auto Iris
The reference value for automatic iris adjustment
can be changed to aid the shooting of clear
pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent blownout highlights.
Convergence
level
Description
–99
Sets the iris 2 f-stops or more
darker
±0
Reference level
+99
Sets the iris 2 f-stops or more
lighter
Setting the Auto Iris Operating Mode
Set the operating mode used when adjusting
levels using auto iris.
1 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Mode in the
setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the operating
mode, then press the knob.
Operating
mode
Description
Backlight
Mode for shooting in backlight
conditions
Standard
Standard mode
Spotlight
Mode for reducing blown out
highlights when there are
spotlights centered on a
subject.
Set the target convergence level for
auto iris
1 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Level in the setup
menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the level in the
range –99 to +99, then press the knob.
Setting the auto iris speed
Set the operating speed when adjusting levels
using auto iris.
1 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Speed in the
setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the speed in the
range –99 (slowest) to +99 (fastest), then press
the knob.
3 Turn the MENU knob to change the reference
value.
[Note]
Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is not
ECS.
The current reference value is shown by the iris
position indicator (page 15) on the
viewfinder screen.
ˎˎTo open the iris slightly, turn the MENU
knob counterclockwise as seen from the
front of the camcorder.
Select one of +0.25, +0.5, +0.75, or +1.
ˎˎTo close the iris slightly, turn the MENU
knob clockwise as seen from the front of the
camcorder.
Select one of –0.25, –0.5, –0.75, or –1.
The changed reference value is retained until
the power of the camcorder is turned off. Even
if the reference value is changed, it reverts to
the standard value every time the power is
turned on.
Changing the Reference Value of the
Lens Iris
Setting the Auto Iris Detection
Window
The reference value for the lens iris can be set
within the following range with respect to the
standard value.
ˎˎ+0.25 to +1 (increments of 0.25): About 0.25 to 1
stop further open
ˎˎ–0.25 to –1 (increments of 0.25): About 0.25 to 1
stop further closed
Also you can set the area where light detection
occurs.
1 Set Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window
1 Set Operation >Auto Iris >Iris Override in the
setup menu to On.
2 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
Indication in the setup menu to On.
The current automatic iris window appears on
the viewfinder screen.
If it is not necessary to display the auto iris
window on the screen, set to Off.
2 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window
in the setup menu.
3 Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris
window appears, and then press the knob.
The shaded parts indicate the area
of light detection.
If you select Var, the following items become
effective and you can set the window of the
desired size. Set Operation >Auto Iris >Iris Var
Width, Iris Var Height, Iris Var, Iris Var H Position,
and Iris Var V Position in the setup menu.
Item
setting
Iris Var Width
The width of the window
Iris Var Height
The height of the window
Iris Var H
Position
The position of the window
in the horizontal direction
Iris Var V
Position
The position of the window
in the vertical direction.
When you exit the menu, the auto iris window
selected in step 3 appears.
Unless you need to keep this window displayed,
set Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window
Indication in the setup menu to Off.
Reducing the Effect of Bright
Highlights
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too
much, leaving the overall image dark, a condition
known as clipped blacks. In such cases, switching
the clip highlight function on will clip the signal
above a certain level, reducing the effects of the
auto iris.
Set Operation >Auto Iris >Clip High Light in the
setup menu to On.
000
39
3. Settings and Adjustments: Setting Auto Iris
Adjusting the Iris Gain on the Lens
Supplied with the PXW-X400KC
1 Set the iris mode switch to the A (auto)
position.
2 Flip off the rubber cap of the iris gain
adjustment trimmer.
3 Turn the iris gain adjustment trimmer using a
screwdriver, or similar object, to adjust the
gain.
Turn clockwise to increase the gain. Turn
counterclockwise to decrease the gain.
Adjust while watching the iris ring on the lens
body.
4 Reattach the rubber cap.
000
40
3. Settings and Adjustments
Adjusting the Focus
This section describes the focus adjustment when
using the lens supplied with the PXW-X400KF.
Using Macro Mode
[Notes]
ˎˎ The lens is designed with an extra margin at the infinity
position (∞), to compensate for focus drifting due to
variations in temperature. When shooting a subject at
infinity in MF or Full MF mode, check the picture in the
viewfinder as you focus.
ˎˎ Auto focus support is planned for a future upgrade.
Adjusting in Full MF Mode
When you slide the focus ring back (toward the
camcorder), the focus mode is set to Full MF mode
for full manual focus adjustment.
[Note]
When you slide the focus ring back, the focus instantly
moves to the marker position.
Focus by turning the focus ring while viewing the
viewfinder.
The distance indications on the ring are valid in
Full MF mode. The distances where the picture is
in focus correspond to absolute positions of the
focus ring.
Peaking
You can turn the PEAKING knob on the viewfinder
to use the peaking function. Edges are emphasized
in the monitor picture, which facilitates manual
focusing.
The recorded video signals are not affected.
Using the Focus Ring
Adjust the focus by turning the focus ring while
viewing the viewfinder.
The distance indications on the ring are invalid in
MF mode.
When the focus mode is MF, set the MACRO
switch to the ON position to enable macro mode.
Macro mode allows you to adjust the focus over a
range that includes the macro area.
Macro mode is disabled in Full MF mode.
000
41
3. Settings and Adjustments
Adjusting the Audio Level
When you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO,
the input levels of analog audio signals recorded
on each channel are adjusted automatically. You
can also make manual adjustments.
[Note]
Even if you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO, the input
levels of digital audio signals are not adjusted automatically.
Target Audio Level for Manual
Adjustment
Make adjustment using –20 dB as the target level.
If the audio level meter shows a maximum level of
0 dB, then it indicates that the input audio level is
excessive.
Excessive input level
2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es)
corresponding to the channel(s) selected in
step 1 to MANUAL.
3 With the LEVEL knob(s) for the channel(s)
selected in step 1, adjust so that the audio
level meter shows up to –20 dB for a normal
input volume.
Selecting the knob used for adjusting the
recording level
In Maintenance >Audio in the setup menu, you
can select which audio level control controls
the audio recording level of the input to each
of the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors. The
correspondences between the settings of the
menu items and the controls are as follows.
[Note]
If an AES/EBU digital audio signal is input, the recording level
cannot be adjusted using the camcorder.
Rear1/WRR Level: Channel 1 recording level
Target input level
1 To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO IN
CH-1 or CH-2 connector, set the AUDIO IN CH1
or CH2 switch to REAR.
To adjust both input signals, set both switches
to REAR.
1 Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switch(es)
2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for the
desired channel(s) selected in step 1 to
MANUAL.
3 Turn the MIC LEVEL knob, and adjust so that
the audio level meter shows up to –20 dB for a
normal input volume.
Selecting the knob used for adjusting the
recording level
In Maintenance >Audio in the setup menu, you
can select which audio level control controls the
audio recording level of the front microphone
input. The correspondences between the settings
of the menu items and the controls are as follows.
MIC CH1 Level: Channel 1 recording level
Knob
Side1
LEVEL (CH1) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Setting
Knob
Front+Side1
LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked operation)
Side1
LEVEL (CH1) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Front+Side1
LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked operation)
Setting
Knob
Side2
LEVEL (CH2) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Setting
Knob
Front+Side2
LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked operation)
Side2
LEVEL (CH2) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Front+Side2
LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked operation)
[Note]
When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs
and MIC LEVEL knob linked together, if the MIC LEVEL knob
is set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be
recorded. Check the position of the MIC LEVEL knob before
adjusting the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs.
[Note]
When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL knob and LEVEL
(CH1/CH2) knobs linked together, if the LEVEL (CH1/CH2)
knobs are set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2
cannot be recorded. Check the position of the LEVEL (CH1/
CH2) knobs before adjusting the MIC LEVEL knob.
to FRONT.
Setting
Rear2/WRR Level: Channel 2 recording level
Manually Adjusting the Audio Levels
of the Audio Inputs from the AUDIO
IN CH-1/CH-2 Connectors
Manually Adjusting the Audio Level
of the MIC IN Connector
MIC CH2 Level: Channel 2 recording level
Recording Audio on Channels 3 and 4
1 Select the audio recorded on audio channels 3
and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH3/CH4 switches.
CH3 switch
Channel 3 recording target
FRONT
Front microphone audio
REAR
Audio signal input to AUDIO IN
CH1 connector
WIRELESS
Wireless microphone audio
CH4 switch
Channel 4 recording target
FRONT
Front microphone audio
REAR
Audio signal input to AUDIO IN
CH2 connector
Wireless microphone audio
WIRELESS
2 To adjust automatically, set the AUDIO SELECT
CH 3-4 switch to AUTO.
To adjust manually, set the AUDIO SELECT CH
3-4 switch to MANUAL.
3 Select the knobs that adjust the audio levels
with the Audio CH3 Level and Audio CH4 Level
items under Maintenance >Audio in the setup
menu.
Audio CH3 Level: Channel 3 recording level
Setting
Knob
Side3
LEVEL (CH3) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
000
42
3. Settings and Adjustments: Adjusting the Audio Level
Setting
Knob
Front+Side3
LEVEL (CH3) knob and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked operation)
Audio CH4 Level: Channel 4 recording level
Setting
Knob
Side4
LEVEL (CH4) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Front+Side4
LEVEL (CH4) knob and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked operation)
You can now adjust the levels of audio
channels 3 and 4 with the knobs selected here.
000
43
3. Settings and Adjustments
Setting Time Data
Setting the Timecode
The timecode setting range is from 00:00:00:00 to
23:59:59:29 (hours:minutes:seconds:frames).
1 Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch
the display in the LCD monitor to status
display.
2 Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
3 Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
PRESET.
4 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.
The first (leftmost) digit of the timecode
flashes.
5 Use the up and down arrow buttons to
change values, and use the left and right arrow
buttons to move the flashing digit. Repeat
until all digits are set.
To reset the value to 00:00:00:00, press the
RESET/RETURN button.
6 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or
R-RUN.
F-RUN: Free run (timecode generator keeps
running)
R-RUN: Recording run (timecode generator
runs only while recording)
[Note]
When picture cache mode is active, time data cannot be set
by switching the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET. To set time
data, turn picture cache mode off.
Switching between DF and NDF
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or
non-drop frame (NDF) mode using Maintenance
>Timecode >DF/NDF in the setup menu.
To make the timecode consecutive
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to
R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on the
media normally produces consecutive timecode.
However, once you remove the media and record
on another media, the timecode will no longer
be consecutive when you use the original media
again for recording.
In this case, to make the timecode consecutive, set
the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN.
Saving the real time in the timecode
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode. The
time of the camcorder internal clock is applied as
the real time.
For details about adjusting the internal clock, see “Setting the
Date and Time of the Internal Clock” (page 24).
Setting the User Bits
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal
digits), you can record user information such as
the date, time, or scene number on the timecode
track.
To reset the value to 00 00 00 00, press the
RESET/RETURN button.
5 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or
R-RUN, corresponding to the desired operating
mode for the timecode generator.
User bit memory function
The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is
automatically retained in memory even when the
power is turned off.
Synchronizing the Timecode to an
External Source
You can synchronize the internal timecode
generator of this camcorder with an external
generator. You can also synchronize the timecode
generators of other camcorders/VTRs with the
internal generator of this camcorder.
1 Connect both the reference video signal and
the external timecode as illustrated below.
Example 1: Synchronizing with an external
signal
1 Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch
the display in the LCD monitor to status
display.
2 Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.
3 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.
The first (leftmost) digit flashes.
4 Use the up and down arrow buttons to
change values, and use the left and right arrow
buttons to move the flashing digit. Repeat
until all digits are set.
To next camcorder
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
VIDEO OUT connector
TC OUT connector
TC IN connector
GENLOCK IN connector
2 Turn on the POWER switch.
3 Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
PRESET.
[1]
[2]
External timecode
Reference video signal
[1] GENLOCK IN connector
[2] TC IN connector
Example 2: Interconnecting a number of
camcorders with one camcorder as reference
4 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN.
5 Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
6 Supply a timecode signal and a reference
video signal, complying with the SMPTE
standard and in proper phase relationship, to
the TC IN connector and to the GENLOCK IN
connector, respectively.
This operation synchronizes the internal
000
44
3. Settings and Adjustments: Setting Time Data
timecode generator with the external
timecode. Once about ten seconds have
elapsed after the timecode locks, the external
lock state is maintained even if the external
timecode source is disconnected.
To release the external synchronization, first
stop the external timecode input, then set the
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When you finish the above procedure, the internal
timecode is immediately synchronized with the external
timecode and the time data display will show the value of
the external timecode. However, wait for a few seconds
until the sync generator stabilizes before recording.
ˎˎ If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the
same as the system frequency of the camcorder, the
camcorder cannot be correctly genlocked. If this occurs,
the timecode will not acquire successful lock with the
external timecode.
User bit settings during synchronization
When the timecode is synchronized to an external
signal, only the time data is synchronized with the
external timecode value.
Note on changing the power supply from the
battery pack to an external power supply during
external synchronization
To maintain a continuous power supply, connect
the external power supply to the DC IN connector
before removing the battery pack. You may lose
timecode external synchronization if you remove
the battery pack first.
Camcorder synchronization during external
synchronization
During external synchronization, the camcorder is
genlocked to the reference video signal input from
the GENLOCK IN connector.
000
45
4. Shooting
Basic Operations
This section explains the basic shooting and
recording procedures.
Before starting to shoot, inspect the camera
system to verify that it is operating properly.
1 Attach a fully charged battery pack
(page 21).
2 Load one or two SxS memory cards
(page 28).
If you load two cards, the camcorder switches
automatically to the second card when the
first card becomes full.
3 Set the camcorder’s POWER switch
(page 3) to ON.
4 Make the following settings.
Marker display: On (page 87)
Iris: Auto (page 38)
Zoom: Auto
Camera output: Select the picture currently
being shot (camera picture), and turn the
DCC function on (page 6)
Timecode advance mode: F-RUN (Free Run) or
R-RUN (Rec Run) (page 43)
Audio input channel selection: Auto
(page 9)
5 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the BLACK
position to adjust the black balance
(page 35).
6 Select a filter according to the lighting
conditions, and adjust the white balance
(page 35).
7 Point the camcorder at the subject, and adjust
the focus and zoom.
8 If you are using the electronic shutter, select an
appropriate shutter mode and speed
(page 37).
9 Do one of the following to start recording.
–– Press the REC START button (page 4).
–– Press the VTR button on the lens.
–– Turn on the assignable switch to which the
Rec function has been assigned (page 106).
During recording, the TALLY indicators, the
tally indicator on the front panel of the
viewfinder, and the REC indicator on the
viewfinder screen light. Adjust the zoom and
focus as required.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Never remove the battery pack while the camcorder
is recording (while the ACCESS indicator on the
right-side panel is lit in blue and the ACCESS indicator
in the card slot section is lit in orange). Doing so
risks the loss of several seconds of data before
the recording was interrupted, because internal
processing will not end normally.
ˎˎ The playback control buttons (EJECT, F REV, F FWD,
NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, STOP) do not function
during recording.
ˎˎ If XAVC, MPEG HD, MPEG IMX, or DVCAM is selected
for the video format, you can start recording
immediately when the camcorder is turned on.
However, this is not supported when a special
recording function (excluding Picture Cache mode) is
running, when the timecode is set to REGEN, or when
using planning metadata.
10To stop recording, perform one of the
operations listed in step 9.
The TALLY indicators, the tally indicator on the
front panel of the viewfinder, and the REC
indicator on the viewfinder screen go out, and
camcorder enters recording standby (Stby)
mode.
A clip is created from the video and audio data
and the metadata recorded between steps 9
and 10.
To review the recording (rec review)
With the camcorder in recording standby
mode, press an assignable switch assigned
with the Rec Review function to play back the
last two seconds of the clip at normal speed.
Press and hold an assignable switch assigned
with the Rec Review function for one second
or longer to start play back from the frame two
seconds prior to the last frame at four times
speed in the reverse direction. Then, release
the button to play the clip from that point at
normal speed. The clip is played to the end,
then Rec Review ends and the camcorder
returns to Stby mode.
When the Rec Review function is assigned to
the RET button on the lens, you can also
conduct a review by using the RET button.
11Repeat steps 9 and 10 to continue recording.
With each repetition, another clip is created on
the memory card.
Clip 1
Clip 2
Clip 3
[Notes]
ˎˎ You cannot resume recording for about one second after
stopping recording.
ˎˎ The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on
one memory card is 600. Even if the memory card has
enough free capacity to record more clips, when 600 clips
have been recorded, no further recording is possible.
Clip names
Eight-character clips names (consisting of a
four-character prefix and a four-digit number) are
generated automatically for clips recorded by this
camcorder.
Example: ABCD0001
You can also use Operation >Clip >Title Prefix
in the setup menu to set the clip name prefix
to a user-specified string of characters (four to
46 characters in length). (A user-specified prefix
cannot be changed after recording.)
The four-digit number at the end of clip names is
generated automatically, incrementing as clips are
recorded.
Playing Recorded Clips
When the camcorder is in standby (Stby) mode,
you can play all or part of the most recently
recorded clip (page 45).
1 Insert the SxS memory card to play
(page 28).
2
3
Press the PREV button (page 8) or the F REV
button (page 7) to cue up the clip to play.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator lights, and the
playback picture appears in the viewfinder.
Pausing playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes while play is
paused.
Press the button again to return to play mode.
High-speed playback
Press the F FWD button (page 8) or the F REV
button (page 7).
To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/
PAUSE button.
Stopping playback
Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and the
camcorder enters E-E mode.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback stops and
the thumbnail screen (page 72) appears in
the viewfinder.
Playback also stops and the timecode screen
appears in the viewfinder when you start
recording during playback, and when you eject an
SxS memory card.
000
46
4. Shooting: Basic Operations
Switching between memory cards
When two memory cards are loaded, press the
SLOT SELECT button (page 28) to select the
active slot.
It is not possible to switch between memory cards
during playback.
000
47
4. Shooting
Advanced Operations
Recording Shot Marks
On this camcorder, two types of shot marks are
available. You can record them at user-specified
positions to make it easier for editors to cue up
those positions.
The maximum number of shot marks per clip is
999.
You can also use the Thumbnail menu to add and delete shot
marks in clips. For details, see “Adding/Deleting Essence Marks on
Clips” (page 76).
To record shot marks, turn on an assignable switch
assigned with the Shot Mark 1 or Shot Mark 2
function.
When a shot mark is recorded, a “Shot Mark 1” or
“Shot Mark 2” indication appears in the viewfinder
for about three seconds near the timecode
indicator.
Setting Clip Flags
To make it easier for editors to select good clips,
you can set clip flags in recorded clips.
Clip flags are set in the Thumbnail menu. For
details, see “Adding Clip Flags to Clips” (page 75)
and “Deleting a Clip Flag” (page 76).
to any of the following video formats (page 32).
XAVC-I
XAVC-L
MPEG HD 422
MPEG HD 420
MPEG IMX 50
To start recording in picture cache mode, picture
cache mode and the storage time of images
in memory (picture cache time) must be set
beforehand in the Operation menu.
When recording is started, the duration of footage
that can be recorded retroactively is determined
by the picture cache time. The duration that can
be recorded retroactively may be reduced in some
circumstances, as described in [Notes] below.
[Notes]
ˎˎ The storage of video in memory starts when picture
cache mode is selected. However, if recording is started
immediately after selecting this mode, a portion of the
images shot immediately prior to selecting picture cache
mode will not be recorded.
ˎˎ Images are not stored in memory during playback,
recording review, or thumbnail display, so picture
cache recording of images during these periods is not
supported.
Setting the picture cache time
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Picture
Cache Rec in the setup menu.
The camcorder always maintains a cache of video
and audio data for a set interval (maximum of
15 seconds) in internal storage memory when
shooting, allowing you to record several seconds
of footage before the start of recording.
This function is enabled when the camcorder is set
[Notes]
ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as picture cache
recording, can be used at any one time.
If another special recording mode is enabled while picture
cache recording is in use, picture cache recording is
automatically released.
ˎˎ Changing system settings, such as the video format,
clears all images stored in memory. Consequently, images
shot just before changing settings cannot be recorded, if
recording is started immediately after changing settings.
Picture cache mode is automatically released.
ˎˎ The picture cache time cannot be set during recording.
Starting picture cache recording
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 45).
When recording starts, the “Cache” indication in
the viewfinder changes to the “Rec” indication.
The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on
the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do
during normal recording.
To exit, stop the recording,
Canceling picture cache mode
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
In recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec
Function >Picture Cache Rec in the setup menu
to Off.
3 Select Operation >Rec Function > Cache Rec
Device operation when recording in picture cache
mode
4 Turn the MENU knob to select the picture
The recording procedure is essentially the same,
except for the following points where operation
varies from normal.
ˎˎIf recording is started while accessing media,
the actual start point of recording may be
delayed even longer than the set picture cache
time. The delay increases with the number
the knob.
Recording Retroactive Images
(Picture Cache Rec Function)
Alternatively, instead of performing steps 1 and
2, you can also select picture cache mode using
an assignable switch (page 106) which has been
assigned with the Picture Cache function.
Time in the setup menu.
cache time setting, then press the knob.
0 to 2, 2 to 4, 4 to 6, 6 to 8, 8 to 10, 10 to 12, 12
to 14, or 13 to 15 seconds can be selected.
Once picture cache mode is selected, it is
maintained until the settings are changed.
of recorded clips, so stopping recording and
quickly restarting recording should be avoided
in picture cache mode.
ˎˎRegardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/RRUN switch, the camcorder operates in F-RUN
mode.
ˎˎIn picture cache mode, time data cannot be set
by switching the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
SET.
To set time data, first stop picture cache mode.
ˎˎIf the remaining recording time of the media
in the currently selected slot is shorter than the
picture cache time, images are recorded to the
media (if there is sufficient remaining recording
time) in the non-selected slot.
However, images are not recorded if there is no
media in the non-selected slot or if the media
in the slot has insufficient remaining recording
time. (A message notifying you that there
is insufficient remaining recording time will
appear on the viewfinder screen.)
ˎˎShot marks are not recorded, even if the
shot marks are set before the recording start
operation.
If the camcorder is turned off during recording
ˎˎIf the POWER switch on the camcorder is set
to the OFF position, the media is accessed for
several seconds to record the images stored
in memory up till that moment, and then the
power turns off automatically.
ˎˎIf the battery is removed, the DC cable
disconnected, or the AC adaptor turned off
during recording, the video and audio data
stored in memory is erased, and images up till
that point are not recorded. Care should be
exercised when exchanging the battery.
000
48
4. Shooting: Advanced Operations
Recording Time-lapse Video (Interval
Rec Function)
The camcorder’s Interval Rec function allows you
to capture time-lapse video to the camcorder’s
internal memory. This function is an effective way
to shoot slow-moving subjects.
When you start recording, the camcorder
automatically records a specified number of
frames at a specified interval time.
This function is enabled when the camcorder is set
to any of the following video formats (page 32).
XAVC-I
XAVC-L
MPEG HD 422
Recording interval (Interval Time)
[Notes]
ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Interval Rec
recording, can be used at any one time.
If another special recording mode is enabled while
Interval Rec is in use, for example, Interval Rec is
automatically released.
ˎˎ Interval Rec settings cannot be changed during recording.
Setting Interval Rec
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Interval Rec
in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
the knob.
The camcorder enters Interval Rec mode, and
“Int Stby” appears at the REC indicator position
on the viewfinder screen. (The green tally
indicator in the HDVF series viewfinder also
flashes.)
3 Select [Number of Frames], turn the MENU
knob to select the number of frames to record
in one take, and then press the knob.
You can select 2, 6, or 12 when the format is
50P or 59.9P.
You can select 1, 3, 6, or 9 when the format is
23.98P, 25P, 29.97P, 50i, or 59.94i.
4 Select [Interval Time], turn the MENU knob to
Number of frames in one take
(Number of Frames)
A pre-lighting function is available when Interval
Rec is enabled. This function automatically turns
on the video light before recording starts, which
allows you to record pictures under stable light
and color temperature conditions.
select the desired interval, and then press the
knob.
You can select 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec, 1
to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min, or 1 to 4/6/12/24
hour.
5 As required, select [Pre-Lighting], turn the
MENU knob to select the length of lighting
time before recording starts, and then press
the knob.
You can select 2, 5, 10 seconds. or Off.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If you want to turn the video light on before the start
of recording, set the camcorder’s LIGHT switch to
AUTO. The video light switch must also be turned on.
When this is done, the video light turns on and off
automatically. However, the video light remains lit if
the time that it would be off is five seconds or less.
ˎˎ If you set the LIGHT switch to MANUAL and turn the
video light switch on, the video light is always lit. (The
video light does not turn on and off automatically.)
The camcorder exits Interval Rec mode when it is
powered off, but the number of frames, interval
time, and pre-lighting settings are maintained. You
do not need to set them again the next time you
shoot in Interval Rec mode.
Starting Interval Rec recording
Make the settings and preparations described
in “Basic Operations” (page 45), secure the
camcorder so that it does not move, and begin
shooting.
When Interval Rec mode is set to On, “Int Stby”
appears at the REC position on the viewfinder
screen. When you start recording, “Int Rec” and
“Int Stby” are displayed alternately. The TALLY
indicators and the tally indicator on the front panel
of the viewfinder light as they do during normal
recording. (The green tally indicator in the HDVF
series viewfinder also flashes at high speed.)
If you are using the pre-lighting function, the video
light comes on before recording starts.
To exit, stop the recording,
When shooting ends, the video data stored in
memory up to that point is written to the media.
Canceling Interval Rec mode
Do one of the following.
ˎˎSet the POWER switch to OFF.
ˎˎIn recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec
Function >Interval Rec in the setup menu to Off.
[Note]
Restarting the camcorder automatically releases Interval Rec
mode.
Limitations during recording
ˎˎRegardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/RRUN switch, the advance mode of the internal
timecode generator is always R-RUN.
ˎˎAudio is not recorded.
ˎˎReviewing the recording (Rec Review) is not
possible.
ˎˎGenlock is not possible.
If the camcorder is turned off during recording
ˎˎIf the POWER switch on the camcorder is set
to the OFF position, the media is accessed for
several seconds to record the images stored
in memory up till that moment, and then the
power turns off automatically.
ˎˎIf power is lost because the battery was
removed, the DC power cord was disconnected,
or the power was turned off on the AC adaptor
side, then the video and audio data shot up to
that point may be lost (maximum 10 seconds).
Care should be exercised when exchanging the
battery.
Shooting with Slow & Quick Motion
When the video format (page 32) is set to one
of the formats listed below, you can specify a
recording frame rate that is different from the
playback frame rate.
[Note]
If shooting in XAVC recording format, the use of SxS Pro+
memory cards is recommended. The use of other SxS
memory cards may be subject to limitations, so you should
contact your dealer.
000
49
4. Shooting: Advanced Operations
Recording
format
System
frequency
S&Q frame rate
XAVC-I 1080P
29.97P/23.98P/
25P
1 FPS to 60 FPS
(1 FPS units)
XAVC-L 50
1080P
59.94P/50P/
29.97P/23.98P/
25P
XAVC-L 35
1080P
59.94P/50P/
29.97P/23.98P/
25P
HD422 50
1080P
29.97P
23.98P
25P
rate while viewing the display in the viewfinder by
turning the MENU knob.
The Slow & Quick Motion mode setting and the
frame rate are retained even after the camcorder is
powered off.
[Notes]
1 FPS to 30 FPS
(1 FPS units)
1 FPS to 25 FPS
(1 FPS units)
By shooting with a frame rate that differs from
the playback frame rate, you can obtain slow and
quick motion effects that are smoother than lowspeed or high-speed playback of content recorded
at the normal frame rate.
Setting Slow & Quick Motion
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick
Motion in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
the knob.
Slow & Quick Motion starts, and “S&Q Stby”
appears in the recording status indicator area
in the viewfinder.
Next, set the frame rate.
3 Select Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick
Motion >Frame Rate in the setup menu.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select the frame rate,
then press the knob.
When you finish making these settings, the system
frequency and the frame rate appear at the top of
the viewfinder screen. You can change the frame
ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Slow & Quick
Motion, can be used at any one time.
ˎˎ If another special recording function is enabled while
using Slow & Quick Motion, Slow & Quick Motion is
automatically canceled.
ˎˎ Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set during recording,
playback, or while the thumbnail screen is displayed.
ˎˎ Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set if the slow shutter
function is set.
Starting Slow & Quick Motion recording
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 45).
When recording starts, the “S&Q Stby” indication
in the viewfinder changes to the “S&Q Rec”
indication. The TALLY indicators and the tally
indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light
as they do during normal recording.
To exit, stop the recording,
[Note]
It takes longer than normal for recording to stop when the
frame rate is set to a low value (for a slow frame rate).
Canceling Slow & Quick Motion mode
With the camcorder in recording standby mode,
set Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick in the
setup menu to Off.
Limitations during recording
ˎˎRegardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/RRUN switch, the advance mode of the internal
timecode generator is always R-RUN.
ˎˎAudio cannot be recorded when the recording
and playback frame rates differ.
ˎˎReviewing the recording (Rec Review) is not
possible.
ˎˎIf you change the recording frame rate to a
value faster than the current shutter speed, the
shutter speed is changed to the slowest value
for which shooting is possible.
Example: If the frame rate is 32 and the shutter
speed is 1/40, and you change the frame rate to
55, then the shutter speed is changed to 1/60.
It is not possible to select a shutter speed that is
slower than the recording frame rate.
ˎˎGenlock is not possible.
Recording with the Clip Continuous
Rec Function
Normally, a clip is created as an independent file
each time that you start and stop recording. But
this function allows you to start and stop recording
while continuously recording to the same clip, for
as long as the function remains enabled. This is
convenient when you do not want to generate a
large number of short clips, and when you want
to record without worrying about exceeding the
clip limit.
It is still easy to find recording start points, because
a Rec Start essence mark is recorded at the
recording start point each time you start recording.
This function is enabled when the camcorder is set
to any of the following video formats (page 32).
XAVC-I
XAVC-L
MPEG HD 422
Setting Clip Continuous Rec
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Clip
Continuous Rec in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
the knob.
“Cont Stby” appears in the viewfinder, and the
function is enabled.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Clip
Continuous Rec, can be used at any one time.
ˎˎ If another special recording mode is enabled while Clip
Continuous Rec is in use, for example, the currently
selected mode is automatically released.
You can assign the Clip Continuous Rec on/off
function to one of the ASSIGN. 1/2/3 switches,
ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches, or the ONLINE button.
For details, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches”
(page 106).
Starting Clip Continuous Rec recording
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 45).
When recording starts, the “Cont Stby” indication
in the viewfinder changes to “Cont Rec”
indication.
The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on
the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do
during normal recording.
[Note]
During recording or in recording standby mode (when
“Cont Stby” indication is displayed), if you remove the media,
the battery, or the power source, the media needs to be
restored. It is not possible to restore media on a device other
than this camcorder.
Exit Clip Continuous Rec mode (page 50) and then remove
the media.
When “Cont Stby” indication is flashing (once per second),
you can remove the media.
To exit, stop the recording,
[Note]
Stop the recording after recording for two or more seconds.
000
50
4. Shooting: Advanced Operations
Canceling Clip Continuous Rec mode
Operation >Format
>Rec Format in the
setup menu
Operation >Format
>Frequency in the setup
menu
XAVC-L 50 720P
59.94/50
XAVC-L 35 1080P
59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
Limitations during recording
XAVC-L 35 1080i
59.94/50
XAVC-L 25 1080i
59.94/50
A single continuous clip cannot be created if you
perform one of the following operations while the
camcorder is in recording or recording standby
mode. (A new clip will be created when you next
start recording.)
ˎˎOperate on a clip (lock, delete, or rename a clip)
ˎˎSwitch slots
ˎˎChange the recording format
ˎˎTurn off the POWER switch
ˎˎPlayback
ˎˎSwitch to the thumbnail screen
HD 422 50 1080P
29.97/25/23.98
HD 422 50 1080i
59.94/50
HD 422 50 720P
59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
HQ 1920×1080P
29.97/25/23.98
HQ 1920×1080i
59.94/50
HQ 1440×1080i
59.94/50
HQ 1280×720P
59.94/50
HQ 1920×1080i
59.94/50
With the camcorder in recording standby mode,
set Operation >Rec Function >Clip Continuous
Rec in the setup menu to Off.
Recording Video Simultaneously to
Two SxS Memory Cards (Simul Rec)
When the video format (page 32) is set to one of
the options in the following table, you can record
the same video to two SxS memory cards. This
function is useful for making a video backup while
shooting.
[Note]
It is recommended that both SxS memory cards be
formatted (initialized) using the camcorder before use.
Operation >Format
>Rec Format in the
setup menu
Operation >Format
>Frequency in the setup
menu
XAVC-I 1080P
29.97/25/23.98
XAVC-I 1080i
59.94/50
XAVC-I 720P
59.94/50
XAVC-L 50 1080P
59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
XAVC-L 50 1080i
59.94/50
Setting Simul Rec
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Simul Rec in
the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
the knob.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Simul Rec,
can be used at any one time.
ˎˎ If another special recording mode is enabled while using
Simul Rec, Simul Rec is automatically released.
ˎˎ Simul Rec cannot be set during recording, playback, or
while the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Starting Simul Rec recording
1 Insert SxS memory cards in both memory slots
A and B.
The ACCESS indicators for SxS slots A and B are
lit. Also, icons for SxS slots A and B appear in
the viewfinder (page 17).
2 Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 45).
[Notes]
ˎˎ Simultaneous recording is not possible if either of the
media is defective or if the media is write protected.
ˎˎ During simultaneous recording, if either of the media
becomes full or an error occurs and recording cannot
continue, recording to that media stops but recording to
the other media continues.
To exit, stop the recording,
Canceling Simul Rec mode
In recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec
Function >Simul Rec in the setup menu to Off.
000
51
4. Shooting
Proxy Data
Proxy data is made up of low-resolution video data
(H.264) and audio data (AAC-LC). This lightweight
proxy data can be used in the same way as the
original data, but it can be transferred more
quickly, for more efficient viewing and editing.
During clip recording, proxy data is recorded onto
the SD card inserted into the PROXY SD card slot.
PROXY SD card slot
settings in the setup menu.
–– Set Operation >Proxy Recording Mode
>Setting to Off.
–– Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to Off.
ˎˎAttempting to remove the SD card while either
the proxy recording or wireless LAN connection
function is enabled may display a warning
(E91-1C0) in some cases. If the warning appears
while recording, data is still recorded correctly
to the SxS memory cards, but proxy files are not
recorded. The warning message can be cleared
by turning the camcorder off and then on again.
ˎˎProxy recording will not start if Picture Cache
Rec, Interval Rec, Slow & Quick Motion,
streaming, or network client mode is enabled.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to
format the card appears.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message and progress
state (%) is displayed and the ACCESS indicator
is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
[Note]
Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card. The card
cannot be restored.
SD Cards
By importing proxy data recorded on the SD
card into a computer, you can quickly check the
recorded content or perform rapid offline editing.
Checking the remaining recording capacity
SD cards supported for recording proxy data
SDHC memory cards (Speed Class: 4 or higher,
Capacity: up to 32 GB)
* Referred to as “SD cards” in this manual.
To use an SD card formatted on the camcorder in
the slot of another device
Formatting (initializing) SD cards
First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the
card in the device to be used.
SD cards must be formatted the first time they are
used in the camcorder.
SD cards for use in the camcorder should be
formatted using the format function of the
camcorder. If a message appears when the SD card
is inserted into the camcorder, format the SD card.
Recording Proxy Data
*
Proxy Recording using the Camcorder
ˎˎProxy recording will not start unless an SxS
memory card is inserted.
ˎˎWhen the camcorder has been turned on for
about 45 seconds, the
icon (media status
indicator for Proxy SD slot) turns on in the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen to indicate that
proxy recording is enabled.
If you start shooting while the
icon is
flashing or is not lit, proxy files are not recorded.
ˎˎBefore removing an SD card from the
camcorder, always check that the ACCESS
indicator for the PROXY SD card slot is not lit,
then turn off the camcorder or turn off the proxy
recording/wireless LAN connection function.
To turn off the proxy recording/wireless LAN
connection function, make the following
You can check the remaining capacity on an SD
card on the Media Status screen (page 14).
1 Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode
>Setting in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
the knob.
3 Select Operation >Format Media >SD
Card(Proxy) in the setup menu.
1 Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode
>Setting in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
the knob.
3 Insert an SD card for recording proxy data into
the PROXY SD card slot.
4 Start recording.
The proxy data file is saved in the “/PRIVATE/
PXROOT/Clip” directory of the SD card at the
same time as the original data is being
recorded onto an SxS memory card.
Proxy data recording automatically stops when
you stop recording.
About the recorded files
ˎˎThe file system is FAT32, and the file name
extension is “.mp4”.
ˎˎThe timecode is also recorded simultaneously.
ˎˎA still image of the first frame is also recorded
simultaneously.
ˎˎLocation information and a Log file are recorded
simultaneously if the GPS function is enabled.
The Log file is saved in “Root/PRIVATE/SONY/
GPS.”
Canceling proxy data recording
Set Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Setting in
the setup menu to Off.
When there is insufficient remaining capacity on
an SD card
A warning is displayed to indicate that there is
insufficient free space.
Changing proxy recording settings
Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Size
and Audio Channel in the setup menu to change
the settings for the size of the proxy recording
format and the audio channel for proxy recording,
respectively.
Checking proxy recording settings
Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Frame
Rate and Bit Rate in the setup menu to view the
settings for the video frame rate and video bit rate,
respectively.
000
52
4. Shooting
Planning Metadata
Planning metadata is information about shooting
and recording plans, recorded in an XML file.
You can shoot using clip names and shot mark
names defined in advance in a planning metadata
file.
[Note]
Use a font set that is compatible with the language set using
Maintenance >Language in the setup menu when defining
clip names and shot mark names. Using fonts for a language
that is different from the language setting on the camcorder
may cause characters to be displayed abnormally.
Displaying Detailed Information in
Planning Metadata
Clearing the Loaded Planning
Metadata
After loading planning metadata into the
camcorder, you can check the detailed information
that it contains, such as file names, date and time
of creation, and titles.
1 Select Operation >Planning Metadata >Clear
1 Select Operation >Planning Metadata
>Properties in the setup menu.
Loading a Planning Metadata File
into Camcorder Memory when
Recording a Clip
1 Save the planning metadata file on an SxS
memory card beforehand.
Planning metadata files are stored in the
“General/Sony/Planning” directory.
2 Insert an SxS memory card in slot A or B.
3 Select Operation >Planning Metadata >Load
Media(A) or Load Media(B) in the setup menu.
A file list screen appears.
Up to 64 planning metadata files are displayed
in the list.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load
and press the knob.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Load] and press
the knob, then select [Execute] and press the
knob again.
[Note]
Data cannot be loaded from SDXC cards.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], and
then press the knob.
The planning metadata information is
displayed.
Item
Information
File Name
File name
Assign ID
Assign ID
Created
Date and time of creation
Modified
Date and time of most recent
modification
Modified by
Name of person who
modified the file
Title
Title1 specified in file (ASCII
format clip name)
Title2
Title2 specified in file (UTF-8
format clip name)
Material Group
Number of material groups a)
Shot Mark0 to
Shot Mark9
Names defined in file for Shot
Mark 0 to Shot Mark 9
a) Material group: A group of clips recorded with the
same planning metadata.
You can turn the MENU knob to scroll the list.
Memory in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], and
then press the knob.
Deletion starts.
The message “Clear Planning Metadata File
OK” appears when the deletion finishes.
Defining Clip Names in Planning
Metadata
The following two types of clip name strings can
be written in a planning metadata file.
ˎˎAn ASCII format name that appears in the
viewfinder
ˎˎA UTF-8 format name that is actually registered
as the clip name
You can select which type of clip name is
displayed with Operation >Planning Metadata
>Clip Name Disp in the setup menu.
When a clip name is set with planning metadata,
the clip name is displayed.
[Note]
When you define both an ASCII format name and a UTF-8
format name with planning metadata, the UTF-8 format
string is used as the clip name string. If you define either an
ASCII format name or a UTF-8 format name with planning
metadata, the defined format name is displayed though it is
not selected by menu setting.
Clip name string example
Use a text editor to modify the two fields in the
<Title> tag that contain the clip name strings.
The shaded fields in the example are clip name
strings. “Typhoon” is described in ASCII format
(up to 44 characters). “Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo” is
described in UTF-8 format (up to 44 bytes).
“sp” indicates a space and  indicates a carriage
return.
<?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
UTF-8"?>
<PlanningMetadataspxmlns="http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata"spassignId="
P0001"spcreationDate="
2015-09-30T17:00:00+09:00"sp
lastUpdate="
2015-10-06T17:00:00+09:00"sp
version="1.00">
<PropertiessppropertyId="
assignment"spupdate="
2015-10-06T17:00:00+09:00"sp
modifiedBy="Chris">
<TitlespusAscii="Typhoon"sp
xml:lang="en">Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo
</Title>
</Properties>
</PlanningMetadata>
[Notes]
ˎˎ When you create a file, enter each statement as a single
line with a CRLF only after the last character in the
statement line, and do not enter spaces except where
specified.
ˎˎ Up to 44 bytes (or characters) can be entered for the clip
name.
If the UTF-8 format string exceeds 44 bytes, the first 44
bytes are used as the clip name.
If only an ASCII format name is specified, a 44-character
string is used as the clip name.
When neither an ASCII format name string nor UTF-8
format name string can be used, the standard format clip
name is used.
000
53
4. Shooting: Planning Metadata
Setting clip names
1 Load a planning metadata file that contains
clip names into camcorder memory
(page 91).
2 Set Operation >Clip >Clip Naming in the setup
menu to Plan.
Each time that you record a clip, the
camcorder automatically generates a name
consisting of the clip name defined in the
planning metadata file, with the addition of an
underbar (_) and a five-digit serial number
(00001 to 99999).
Examples:Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00001,
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00002,… After the
number reaches 99999, the next increment
returns the number to 00001.
[Note]
When you load another planning metadata file, the serial
number continues incrementing. You can change the
numbering using Operation >Clip >Number Set in the setup
menu.
Selecting the clip name display format
When names are defined in both ASCII format and
UTF-8 format, you can use Operation >Planning
Metadata >Clip Name Disp in the setup menu to
select which of the names to display on the LCD
monitor and on the viewfinder screen.
To display ASCII format names:
Select Title1(ASCII).
The clip name becomes “Typhoon_Strikes_
Tokyo_SerialNumber”, but “Typhoon_
SerialNumber” is displayed on the screen.
To display UTF-8 format names:
Select Title2(UTF-8).
The clip name becomes “Typhoon_Strikes_
Tokyo_SerialNumber”, and the same name is
displayed on the screen.
Defining Shot Mark Names in
Planning Metadata
When you use planning metadata to set shot
marks, you can define names for Shot Mark 0 to
Shot Mark 9.
When you record shot marks, you can add the
shot mark name strings defined in the planning
metadata.
[Note]
Only Shot Mark 1 and Shot Mark 2 can be recorded on the
camcorder.
Shot mark name string example
Use a text editor to modify the fields in the <Meta
name> tag.
The shaded fields in the example are essence mark
name strings. Names can be either in ASCII format
(up to 32 characters) or UTF-8 format (up to 16
characters).
“sp” indicates a space and  indicates a carriage
return.
[Note]
If a name string contains even one non-ASCII character, the
maximum length of that string is 16 characters.
<?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
UTF-8"?>
<PlanningMetadata xmlns="http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata"spassignId="
H00123"spcreationDate="
2015-09-30T08:00:00Z"splastUpdate="
2015-09-30T15:00:00Z"spversion=
"1.00">
<PropertiessppropertyId=
"assignment"spclass="original"sp
update="2015-09-30T15:00:00Z"sp
modifiedBy="Chris">
<TitlespusAscii="Football
Game"spxml:lang="en">
Football Game 30/09/2015</
Title>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark1"sp
content="Goal"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark2"sp
content="Shoot"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark3"sp
content="Corner Kick"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark4"sp
content="Free Kick"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark5"sp
content="Goal Kick"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark6"sp
content="Foul"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark7"sp
content="PK"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark8"sp
content="1st Half"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark9"sp
content="2nd Half"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark0"sp
content="Kick Off"/>
</Properties>
</PlanningMetadata>
[Note]
When you create a definition file, enter each statement
as a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in
the statement line, and do not enter spaces except where
specified, except within essence mark name strings.
000
54
4. Shooting
Obtaining Location Information (GPS)
Location and time information of video shot
when positioning is enabled is recorded by the
camcorder.
The GPS function is set to Off by factory default.
1 Check that the camcorder is in standby state.
2 Set Operation GPS to On in the setup menu.
is displayed in the viewfinder when the
camcorder is seeking GPS satellites. When
positioning is established, location information
is recorded when shooting video.
The icon displayed in the viewfinder varies,
depending on the signal reception from the GPS
satellites.
Positioning Display
status
GPS reception state
Off
GPS is set to Off or an
error occurred.
No display
Positioning
not
available
Location information
could not be obtained
because GPS signal
could not be received.
Move to a location with
a clear view of the sky.
Searching
for satellites
Searching for GPS
satellites. Several
minutes may be required
to acquire satellites.
Positioning
A weak GPS signal is
being received.
A GPS signal is being
received. Location
information can be
acquired.
A strong GPS signal is
being received. Location
information can be
acquired.
ˎˎIt may take some time to start acquiring location
information after turning on the camcorder.
ˎˎIf a positioning icon is not displayed after several
minutes, there may be a problem with signal
reception. Start shooting without location
information, or move to an area with a clear
view of the sky. Shooting when a positioning
icon is not displayed means that location
information will not be recorded.
ˎˎThe GPS signal may not be received when
indoors or near tall structures. Move to a
location with a clear view of the sky.
ˎˎThe recording of location information may be
interrupted, depending on the strength of the
received signal, even if a positioning icon is
displayed.
000
55
5. Network Configuration
Network Functions Supported by the Camcorder
The camcorder supports various network functions. This section provides an overview and detailed description of the network connections and functions.
Network Connection Overview
When using the IFU-WLM3 (supplied)
1 Attach the IFU-WLM3 to the camcorder.
Network Function Overview
Common Information
Transferring files recorded on the camcorder to a
server on the Internet
Using Wi-Fi remote control
 (page 56)
Connecting devices using wireless LAN
The camcorder can connect to smartphones,
tablets, and other devices using wireless LAN
connection using the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN
Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN
Adaptor (option).
1 Select the wireless connection device.
IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module
(supplied)  (page 56)
CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option) 
(page 56)
2 Select the wireless LAN access mode.
Wi-Fi Access Point mode  (page 57)
Wi-Fi Station mode  (page 58)
Connecting to the Internet using a LAN cable
Connect the camcorder to the Internet via a router
using the network connector.
1 Connect the camcorder and router using a
LAN cable.
 (page 59)
Connecting to the Internet using wireless LAN
Connect the camcorder to the Internet using the
IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied),
CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option), or
modem (option).
[Note]
The CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit (option) is required if
connecting using a CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option)
or modem (option).
2 Set the wireless LAN access mode to Wi-Fi
Station mode and connect to the Internet.
 (page 60)
When using the CBK-WA02 (option)
1 Attach the CBK-WA02 to the camcorder.
 (page 56)
2 Set the wireless LAN access mode to Wi-Fi
Station mode and connect to the Internet.
 (page 60)
Using a modem
1 Attach the USB extension adaptor of the
CBK-NA1 (option).
 (page 59)
2 Connect the modem.
 (page 60)
You can transfer proxy files recorded on an SD
card and original files recorded on SxS memory
cards to a server on the Internet when connected
via a 3G/4G/LTE network, access point, wired LAN
router.
 (page 62)
Transmitting streaming video and audio
You can transmit the video and audio captured/
played back with the camcorder via the Internet or
local network.
Streaming using the streaming settings on the camcorder
 (page 63)
High-quality streaming using a Sony PWS-100RX1
Network RX Station (option) as a Connection Control
Manager
 (page 64)
You can access the Wi-Fi remote control built into
the camcorder from a smartphone, tablet, or other
device over a wireless LAN connection.
 (page 65)
Configuring from the web menu
The web menu of the camcorder appears when
the camcorder is accessed from a browser
on a device connected using a wireless LAN
connection.
 (page 67)
Supported network functions and operating
limitations
 (page 71)
000
56
5. Network Configuration
Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN
The camcorder can connect to smartphones,
tablets, and other devices using wireless LAN
connection by attaching the IFU-WLM3 USB
Wireless LAN Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02
Wireless LAN Adaptor (option).
The following operations can be performed
between the camcorder and devices connected
using a wireless LAN.
[Note]
USB wireless LAN modules/adaptors other than the IFUWLM3 or CBK-WA02 cannot be used.
Remote operation via wireless LAN
The camcorder can be operated remotely from a
smartphone, tablet, or computer that is connected
using a wireless LAN.
problems, check the connection/communication status
after moving the camcorder to a new location, or bringing
the camcorder and access point/terminal device closer
together.
Compatible Devices
OS
Browser
Smartphone
Android
4.4/5.0/5.1/6.0
Chrome
iOS 8.0/8.1/8.2/
8.3/8.4/9.0
Safari
Android
4.4/5.0/5.1/6.0
Chrome
Tablet
Guard (supplied)
A camcorder camera video feed or playback
video feed can be streamed (H.264/AAC-LC
compression) from a device using the “Content
Browser Mobile” application via a wireless LAN.
Microsoft
Windows 7/
Microsoft
Windows 8/
Microsoft
Windows 10
Chrome
Mac OS
10.9/10.10
Safari
Attaching the CBK-WA02
in the position shown in the following
diagram.
For attachment of the attachment bracket
(Service Part No. A-2092-367-), contact a Sony
service representative.
3 Plug the IFU-WLM3 into the connector.
[Note]
Attachment bracket
2 Attach the USB extension adaptor, supplied
with the CBK-WA02 (option), to the
attachment bracket.
Playback may not be supported, depending on the
operating system of the terminal device used and the
browser version. If this occurs, use “Content Browser Mobile.”
3 Turn the fixing screw clockwise to secure the
USB extension adaptor.
For details about the “Content Browser Mobile” application,
contact your Sony sales or service representative.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Proxy files (low-resolution files) recorded on the SD card in
the camcorder can be streamed via a wireless LAN.
ˎˎ Streaming is not supported when the video format is set
to MPEG-IMX or DVCAM.
ˎˎ Obstructions and electromagnetic interference between
the camcorder and wireless LAN access point or terminal
device, or the ambient environment (such as wall
materials) could shorten the communication range or
prevent connections altogether. If you experience these
Unscrew the two screws, remove the guard, and
close the connector cover.
1 Attach the attachment bracket to the handle
2 Attach the protective cap to the IFU-WLM3.
iOS 8.0/8.1/8.2/
8.3/8.4/9.0
Computer
If not using the IFU-WLM3
module connector.
Device
Video/audio streaming via wireless LAN
“Content Browser Mobile” is an application that
can operate the camcorder remotely on the device
screen, while streaming content, and can be used
to configure the camcorder.
1 Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN
You can use a smartphone, tablet, or computer
to configure and operate the camcorder. The
supported devices, OS, and browsers are shown in
the following table.
File transfer via wireless LAN
Proxy files (low-resolution files) stored on the
camcorder SD card and original files (highresolution files) recorded on the camcorder can be
transferred to a server via a wireless LAN.
Attaching the IFU-WLM3
[Notes]
ˎˎ Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or
removing the IFU-WLM3.
ˎˎ For attachment of the guard, contact a Sony service
representative.
000
57
5. Network Configuration: Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN
Fixing screw
Guard (supplied)
8 Set the wireless LAN channel in Maintenance
>Network >Channel in the setup menu
(page 101).
USB extension adaptor
For details about using the CBK-WA02, refer to the instruction
manual supplied with the CBK-WA02.
[Notes]
You can adjust the position of the USB
extension adaptor over the range shown in the
following diagram.
6 Plug the USB connector of the USB extension
adaptor into the USB wireless LAN module
connector.
ˎˎ Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or
removing the CBK-WA02.
ˎˎ Attaching the CBK-WA02 and selecting Wi-Fi Station
in Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup menu
enables connection to a 5 GHz access point.
ˎˎ The Ch setting “Auto(5GHz)” in Wi-Fi Access Point mode
may not be displayed, depending on the CBK-WA02 used.
ˎˎ “Auto(5GHz)” is not displayed in the menu if use of the
CBK-WA02 in the 5 GHz band is prohibited for outdoor
use in your country or region. Check that the use of the
CBK-WA02 is permitted in your country or region. For
details, refer to the CBK-WA02 operation manual.
Connecting using Wireless LAN
Access Point (Wi-Fi Access Point
Mode)
The camcorder can connect to devices that are set
up as an access point.
Smartphone/
Tablet
Computer
If not using the CBK-WA02
Unscrew the two screws, remove the guard, and
close the connector cover.
Connecting using WPS-equipped devices
4 Attach the protective cap (supplied) to the
Devices that support WPS can be connected using
WPS.
USB connector of the USB extension adaptor.
7 Plug the CBK-WA02 into the USB connector of
the USB extension adaptor.
1 Set Maintenance >Network >Wireless Network
to Wi-Fi Access Point.
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
[Note]
5 Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN
module connector.
For attachment of the guard, contact a Sony
service representative.
It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds) to enable
access point mode. Wait until the network “AP” (access point)
indicator (page 16) stops flashing on the LCD monitor or
in the viewfinder.
3 Select Maintenance >Network >WPS in the
setup menu.
000
58
5. Network Configuration: Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
5 Open the device Network Settings or Wi-Fi
Settings, and turn Wi-Fi on.
6 Select the camcorder SSID from the Wi-Fi
network SSID list, display Option, and select
WPS Push Button.
[Note]
Connecting Using Wireless LAN
Station Mode (Wi-Fi Station Mode)
The camcorder can connect to an existing wireless
LAN access point as a client.
The device connects via the access point.
Computer
Smartphone/
Tablet
3 Set Maintenance >Network >Wireless Network
to Wi-Fi Station.
4 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
[Note]
It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to enable
station mode. Wait until the network indicator (page 16)
signal strength icon stops flashing on the LCD monitor or in
the viewfinder.
5 Select Maintenance >Network >WPS in the
The steps will vary depending on the device used.
setup menu.
Connecting using SSID and password on the
device
6 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
Connect by entering the SSID and password on
the device.
7 Press the access point WPS button.
1 Set Maintenance >Network >Wireless Network
to Wi-Fi Access Point.
press the knob.
Access
point
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
[Note]
It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds) to enable
access point mode. Wait until the net work “AP” (access
point) indicator (page 16) stops flashing on the LCD
monitor or in the viewfinder.
[Note]
If the connection fails, perform the procedure again from
step 1.
8 Connect the device to the access point.
3 Open the device Network Settings or Wi-Fi
For details about how to connect, refer to the
instruction manual for each device.
Settings, and turn Wi-Fi on.
4 Select the camcorder SSID from the Wi-Fi
network SSID list, then enter a password to
connect.
For the camcorder SSID and password, see
Maintenance >Network >SSID & Password
(page 101) in the setup menu.
[Note]
The steps will vary depending on the device used.
For details about WPS button operation, refer
to the instruction manual for the access point.
When the connection is successful, the
network indicator (page 16) signal strength
icon will show a strength of 1 or higher on the
LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
Connecting to an access point using WPS
If an access point supports the WPS function, you
can connect using a basic setting. If an access
point does not support the WPS function, see
“Connecting to an access point in station mode
without using WPS” (page 69).
1 Turn the access point on.
2 Turn the camcorder on.
000
59
5. Network Configuration
Connecting to the Internet
You can connect to the Internet using a wired LAN
or wireless LAN.
For wired LAN, connect a LAN cable (not supplied)
to the network connector on the camcorder, and
connect to the Internet via a router.
For wireless LAN, connect to the Internet using the
IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied),
CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option), or
modem (option).
For details, see “Limitations on Simultaneous Use
of Network Functions” (page 71).
Required device for network connection
You can connect to the Internet using a wired LAN
connection via a router connected to the network
connector on the camcorder.
Wireless LAN connection
One of the following devices is required.
ˎˎIFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied)
ˎˎCBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option) +
CBK-NA1E USB Extension Adaptor supplied with
the CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit (option)
ˎˎModem (option) + CBK-NA1E USB Extension
Adaptor supplied with the CBK-NA1 Network
Adaptor Kit (option)
Wired LAN connection
[Notes]
Limitations on simultaneous use of network
connection function
The camcorder can connect to a network using
wireless LAN or wired LAN methods.
However, there are limits on the simultaneous use
of these connection functions.
camcorder and a router using a LAN cable.
Connecting Using a LAN Cable
(Wired LAN Connection)
Preparation for Connection to the
Internet Using a Modem
Attach the CBK-NA1E USB extension adaptor,
supplied with the CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor
Kit (option), to the USB wireless LAN module
connector on the camcorder when planning to
connect to the Internet via a 3G/4G network using
the USB wireless LAN module connector.
1 Attach the attachment bracket to the handle
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Wired LAN to
Computer
Enable.
3 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
in the position shown in the following
diagram.
For attachment of the attachment bracket
(Service Part No. A-2092-367-), contact a Sony
service representative.
Attachment bracket
An IP address is automatically assigned to the
camcorder.
[Notes]
Router
ˎˎLAN cable (not supplied)
ˎˎ The wireless LAN module may not be available in some
countries/regions.
ˎˎ The frequency band for the wireless LAN module is shared
by various devices. Depending on the use environment,
transmission speed and distance may be decreased, or
communication may be disconnected, by using other
devices.
ˎˎ To use the 3G/4G/LTE services, you need to contract with
a cell phone company.
ˎˎ For details about the required compatible device for the
network connection, contact your Sony dealer or a Sony
service representative.
1 Connect the network connector of the
Internet
ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) for the
wired LAN connection to become enabled. Wait until
the network status indicator (page 16) LAN icon stops
flashing on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
ˎˎ To transfer original files/proxy files recorded on the
camcorder, use Wi-Fi remote control, operate the web
menu, or monitor output using the “Content Browser
Mobile” application, set Maintenance >Network >Wired
LAN Remote in the setup menu to On (page 102).
ˎˎ When connected to a network, using a LAN cable, that will
not be used to connect to the Internet, it is recommended
that Wired LAN Remote be set to On to prevent
unauthorized access from the Internet. When connecting
to the Internet, check that the network connection is to a
secure network before use.
ˎˎ A wired LAN connection is not possible if a modem
(option) is attached to the USB wireless LAN module
connector. For wired LAN connection, first remove the
modem (option).
ˎˎ When connected to the Internet using Wi-Fi Station mode
and the wired LAN is not connected to the Internet, a
network error may occur and Internet-related functions
may not operate. In this case, set Wired LAN to Disable,
and connect to the Internet using Wi-Fi- Station mode
only.
2 Attach the USB extension adaptor to the
attachment bracket.
000
60
5. Network Configuration: Connecting to the Internet
3 Turn the fixing screw clockwise to secure the
USB extension adaptor.
Fixing screw
USB extension adaptor
5 Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN
module connector.
For attachment of the guard, contact a Sony
service representative.
Guard (supplied)
Connecting Using a Modem
You can connect the camcorder to the Internet via
a 3G/4G network by attaching a modem (option)
to the camcorder using a CBK-NA1 Network
Adaptor Kit (option).
Internet
You can adjust the position of the USB
extension adaptor over the range shown in the
following diagram.
CBK-NA1
+
Modem
6 Plug the USB connector of the USB extension
adaptor into the USB wireless LAN module
connector.
Connecting
1 Connect the modem (option) to the USB
connector of the CBK-NA1E USB extension
adaptor.
4 Attach the protective cap (supplied) to the
USB connector of the USB extension adaptor.
For details about connecting a modem, refer to the
instruction manual supplied with the modem.
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Wireless Network
to Modem.
3 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or
removing the CBK-NA1 and modem.
ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to enable
modem mode. Wait until the “3G/4G” network status
indicator (page 16) stops flashing on the LCD screen or
in the viewfinder.
Connecting Using Wireless LAN
Station Mode (Wi-Fi Station Mode)
You can connect to the Internet using Wi-Fi station
mode by attaching the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless
LAN Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN
Adaptor (option) to the camcorder, and using a
3G/4G/LTE-compatible access point (option) or
using device tethering.
For details about attaching devices, see “Attaching
the IFU-WLM3” (page 56) and “Attaching the
CBK-WA02” (page 56).
000
61
5. Network Configuration: Connecting to the Internet
Smartphone/
Tablet
Computer
Access
point
Internet
Smartphone/
Tablet
Internet
If the access point and device supports WPS,
connect using the procedure in “Connecting to
an access point using WPS” (page 58). If WPS is
not supported, connect using the procedure in
“Connecting to an access point in station mode
without using WPS” (page 69).
First, turn the access point and device on, and
configure the device tethering function if planning
to use tethering.
000
62
5. Network Configuration
Transferring Files
You can transfer proxy files recorded on an SD card
and original files recorded on SxS memory cards
to a server on the Internet when connected to the
Internet via a 3G/4G/LTE network, access point, or
wired LAN router.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Margins of up to 15 frames are added before and after the
cutout region in the created file.
ˎˎ Files created from cutouts from proxy files recorded using
network function software (V1.25 or earlier) may not be
imported into non-linear editors.
Transferring original files on SxS memory cards
Preparation for Transfer
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 56) and “Connecting to
the Internet” (page 59).
2 You must first register a server to which you
want to transfer files.
For details about registering a server, see “To
register a new destination server” (page 70).
Transferring
Using “Content Browser Mobile” application
version 2.0 or later, you can quickly display a
thumbnail for a proxy file on an SD card by
using the still image of the first frame.
4 Select the files you want to transfer.
Tap a file to select it. Tap a file a second time to
de-select it. You can double-tap a file to play
the file to check its content.
5 Tap [Transfer].
The default destination server specified in
[Default Setting] appears (see “To register a
new destination server” (page 70)).
To change the destination server, tap the
destination server to display a list and then
select a different server. Enter the directory on
the destination server, as required.
You can select proxy files on an SD card or original
files on SxS memory cards for transfer to a server.
Transferring proxy files on an SD card
1 Connect the camcorder and device using a
LAN connection, then launch a browser on the
device to access the camcorder.
2 Display a file list screen to select files.
3 Tap and select [Media Info], then tap [SD
Card].
The SD Card screen appears.
1 Connect the camcorder and device using a
The default destination server specified in
[Default Setting] appears (see “To register a
new destination server” (page 70)).
To change the destination server, tap the
destination server to display a list and then
select a different server.
Enter the directory on the destination server in
[Directory].
LAN connection, then launch a browser on the
device to connect to the camcorder
“Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN”
(page 56).
2 Select Maintenance >File Transfer >File
Transfer in the setup menu.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
File transfer mode is initiated.
4 Display a file list screen to select files in the
browser on the device.
5 Tap
and select [Media Info], then tap Slot A
(for files recorded on media in slot A) or Slot B
(for files recorded on media in slot B).
The Slot A or Slot B screen appears.
Example: Slot A screen
8 Tap [Transfer].
Transfer of the selected files begins. To cancel
file transfer, tap [Cancel].
[Note]
Files cannot be transferred under the following conditions.
ˎˎ During recording, playback, or when displaying the
thumbnail screen
ˎˎ When Maintenance >Network >Wireless Network >Wi-Fi
Access Point and Wired LAN >Disable in the setup menu
are set to Disable
ˎˎ When the streaming function is enabled (Maintenance
>Streaming >Setting is set to On)
ˎˎ When network client mode is enabled (Maintenance
>Network Client Mode >Setting is set to On)
Monitoring the File Transfer
6 Tap [Transfer].
Transfer of the selected files begins. To cancel
file transfer, tap [Cancel].
Tap [Job List] on the SD Card, Slot A, or Slot B
screen to display the Job List screen to check the
status of the file transfer (page 70).
Transferring parts of proxy files
Using “Content Browser Mobile” application
version 2.0 or later, you can specify In/Out points
from proxy files to cut out and transfer the cutout
parts.
7 Tap [Transfer].
6 Select the files you want to transfer.
Tap a file to select it. Tap a file a second time to
de-select it.
000
63
5. Network Configuration
Transmitting Streaming Video and Audio
You can transmit the video and audio captured/
played back with the camcorder via the Internet or
local network.
Preparation for Streaming
Transmission
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 56) and “Connecting to
the Internet” (page 59).
2 Select Preset1 (or Preset2, Preset3) in
Maintenance >Streaming in the setup menu.
The streaming connection destination setup
screen appears.
3 Set Size, Bit Rate, Type, and items according to
Type on the screen.
4 Select Preset1 (or Preset2, Preset3), set in steps
1 and 2, in Maintenance >Streaming >Preset
Select in the setup menu.
Starting Streaming
1 Set Maintenance >Streaming >Setting in the
setup menu to On.
Streaming starts according to the settings.
You can assign Streaming to an assignable
button. For details about assignment, see
“Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches”
(page 106).
[Notes]
ˎˎ Streaming cannot be started under the following menu
settings.
–– Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup menu is
set to Off
–– Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting in the
setup menu is set to On
ˎˎ It may take several tens of seconds to stream actual video
or audio after starting streaming.
ˎˎ You cannot start streaming when playing back an SD
format clip.
ˎˎ If you set the streaming transmission destination is set
incorrectly or the camcorder does not connect to the
network, “×” appears on the screen as the streaming
status indicator.
ˎˎ Streaming in network client mode (page 64),
monitoring, proxy recording, and file transfer are not
available after switching to streaming mode.
ˎˎ Starting streaming while monitoring, proxy recording, or
transferring files will stop the corresponding function.
Stopping Streaming
Set Maintenance >Streaming >Setting to Off to
stop streaming.
When Streaming is On, streaming can also be
stopped by pressing the assignable button to
which Streaming has been assigned.
When the camcorder is connected to a device
via Wireless LAN (page 56) or is connected to
the Internet using wireless LAN station mode
(page 58), you can also set the streaming
transmission destination and start/stop streaming
from the web menu (page 67).
000
64
5. Network Configuration
Streaming High Quality Video
High-quality streaming is supported by enabling
network client mode and connecting and using
a PWS-100RX1 Network RX Station (option) as a
Connection Control Manager (CCM).
1 Connect the camcorder to the network.
For details, see “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 56) and “Connecting to
the Internet” (page 59).
2 Set each item in Maintenance >Network Client
Mode >Detail Settings in the setup menu.
Item
Description
CCM Address
Enter the IP address of the
CCM to connect. (Host name
or IP address)
CCM Port
Enter the port number of the
CCM to connect.
User Name
Enter the user name.
Password
Enter the password.
[Note]
Network client mode cannot be set if values are not
entered for all items.
3 Set Maintenance >Network Client Mode
>Setting in the setup menu to On.
Network client mode is enabled, and the
camcorder connects to the PWS-100RX1
Network RX Station.
Live streaming starts in response to PWS100RX1 Network RX Station operation.
For details about operation, refer to the
instruction manual for the PWS-100RX1
Network RX Station.
You can assign Setting (On/Off) for Network
Client Mode to an assignable button. For
details about assignment, see “Assigning
Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 106).
[Notes]
ˎˎ Changing to network client mode during normal
streaming (page 63) is not possible.
ˎˎ Normal streaming (page 63), monitoring, proxy
recording, and file transfer are not available after
switching to network client mode.
ˎˎ Switching to network client mode while monitoring,
proxy recording, or transferring files will stop the
corresponding operation.
000
65
5. Network Configuration
Using Wi-Fi Remote Control
You can access the Wi-Fi remote control built into
the camcorder from a smartphone, tablet, or other
device over a wireless LAN connection.
Using the Wi-Fi remote control allows you to
operate the camcorder remotely. This allows
you to start/stop recording or configure settings
remotely, and is useful in applications where
the camcorder is fixed in a remote location or
mounted on a crane, for example.
Displaying the Wi-Fi Remote Control
The Wi-Fi Remote screen is automatically resized
to match the screen size of the connected device.
using [Cam Remote Control] (page 67) from
the web menu.
Wi-Fi Remote Screen (Smartphones)
[Notes]
ˎˎ To display the page for a smartphone, change “rm.
html” to “rms.html” in the URL. To display the page for a
tablet, change “rm.html” to “rmt.html” in the URL. When
“rm.html” is entered, the page automatically switches
for display on the corresponding device. However, the
appropriate page may not be displayed, depending on
the device.
ˎˎ The Wi-Fi Remote screen may not match the camcorder
settings under the following circumstances. If this occurs,
reload the browser window.
–– If the camcorder is restarted while connected
–– If the camcorder is operated directly while connected
–– If the device has been reconnected
–– If the browser Forward/Back buttons have been used
ˎˎ The Wi-Fi remote control may not function if the wireless
signal strength becomes weak.
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Shooting settings
Iris, Focus, Zoom, S&Q FPS,
Shutter, White, Gamma, Auto
Iris, Gain, ATW, Color Bars, Auto
Black, Auto White
Assign screen
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 56) and “Connecting to
the Internet” (page 59).
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Assignable buttons
Assignable buttons 0, 1, 3, 4, 5
2 Launch a browser on the device and enter
3 Enter the user name and password
(Maintenance >Basic Authentication
(page 101) in the setup menu) on the
browser screen.
When connection is successful, the Wi-Fi
Remote screen appears on the device.
You use the Wi-Fi Remote screen to operate
the camcorder.
You can disable the REC button operation by
sliding the Lock knob to the right on the
screen.
You can also display the Wi-Fi remote control
ˎˎ Status indicators
ˎˎ Cursor control buttons, menu/
status display
Up, Left, Set, Right, Down,
Cancel/Back, Menu, Status,
Thumbnail, Option (SHIFT +
SET)
Main screen
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using
“http://<IP_address>/rm.html” in the URL bar,
where “<IP_address>” is the IP address
(Maintenance >Network >IP Address (Wireless)
in the setup menu) of the camcorder.
For example, if the IP address is 192.168.1.1,
enter “http://192.168.1.1/rm.html” in the URL
bar.
Cursor screen
Playback screen
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Playback control buttons
F Rev, Play/Pause, F Fwd, Prev,
Stop, Next
000
66
5. Network Configuration: Using Wi-Fi Remote Control
Wi-Fi Remote Screen (Tablets)
Cursor screen
Main screen
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Cursor control buttons, menu/status display
Up, Left, Set, Right, Down, Cancel/Back, Menu, Status,
Thumbnail, Option (SHIFT + SET)
Assign screen
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Assignable buttons
Assignable buttons 0, 1, 3, 4, 5
ˎˎ Shooting settings
S&Q FPS, Shutter, White, Gamma, Auto Iris, Gain, ATW,
Color Bars, Auto Black, Auto White
Playback screen
ˎˎ Assignable buttons
Assignable buttons 0, 1, 3, 4, 5
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Playback control buttons
F Rev, Play/Pause, F Fwd, Prev, Stop, Next
000
67
5. Network Configuration
Configuring from the Web Menu
The web menu of the camcorder appears when
the camcorder is accessed from a browser
on a device connected using a wireless LAN
connection. Using the web menu, you can
configure settings related to wireless functions,
transfer files, and perform other actions.
Displaying the Web Menu
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 56) and “Connecting to
the Internet” (page 59).
2 Launch a browser on the device and enter
“http://192.168.1.1:8080/index.html” in the URL
bar.
The user name and password entry screen
appears.
3 Enter a user name and password, then select
[OK].
For the user name and password for access
authentication, see Maintenance >Basic
Authentication (page 101) in the setup menu.
Info, Job List, and Cam Remote Control.
Settings
Used to configure the camcorder. This screen has
the following items.
Item
Description
See
Wireless
Module
>Streaming
Format
Streaming
format
settings
Streaming Format
Settings(page 67)
Wireless
Module
>Proxy
Format
Proxy format
settings
Proxy Format
Settings(page 68)
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
settings
>Station
Settings
[Note]
Playback may not be supported, depending on the
operating system of the terminal device used and the
browser version. If this occurs, use “Content Browser
Mobile.”
ˎˎSlot A: Media inserted into card slot A of the
camcorder
ˎˎSlot B: Media inserted into card slot B of the
camcorder
Job List
Wireless LAN Station
Settings(page 68)
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Checking wireless
>Status
settings status LAN
settings(page 69)
Wired LAN
>Wired LAN
Settings
Wired LAN
settings
Wired LAN
Settings(page 69)
Wired LAN
>Status
Wired LAN
Checking wired LAN
settings status settings(page 69)
Upload
Settings
Transfer
settings
Transfer (Upload)
Settings(page 69)
Displays the Job List screen for managing file
transfers (page 70).
Cam Remote Control
Displays the Wi-Fi remote control screen
(page 65).
Streaming Format Settings
You can configure the stream for monitoring
by devices, and set the format and transmission
destination of the stream for streaming via the
Internet or local network.
Video
Setup Menu
Launch a browser on the device and enter
“http://<IP_address>/rm.html” in the URL
bar, where “<IP_address>” is the IP address
(Maintenance >Network >IP Address in the setup
menu) of the camcorder, to display the Media Info
>SD Card screen of the camcorder
Tapping
in the top left of the web menu screen
will display the configuration menus. Tap the item
you want to configure.
The menu has the following items: Settings, Media
Media Info
Displays media information and is used to select
files to transfer from media.
ˎˎSD Card: Media inserted into the PROXY SD card
slot of the camcorder
Double-clicking a file will start playback of the
selected file.
ˎˎAVC/H.264 Main Profile, 4:2:0 Long GOP
ˎˎSize is selected in the following settings.
Audio
ˎˎAAC-LC compression
ˎˎSampling frequency: 48 kHz
ˎˎBit rate: 128 kbps for stereo
Monitoring Settings
You can set the format for monitoring by devices.
Item
Description
Setting
Monitoring Sets the video size 480×270(1Mbps)/
480×270(0.5Mbps)
Size
and bit rate for
monitoring.
Monitoring Displays the video 23.98fps/25fps/
29.97fps/50fps/
Frame Rate frame rate for
59.94fps
monitoring.
Monitoring Displays the video 1Mbps(VBR)/
0.5Mbps(VBR)
Bit Rate
bit rate for
monitoring.
[Notes]
ˎˎ The bit rate is an average value, so this value may be
exceeded at times.
ˎˎ A video frame rate of 24 fps is not supported.
ˎˎ 640×360 (3Mbps (VBR)) is not supported for Monitoring
Size.
000
68
5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu
Streaming settings
You can set the format and transmission
destination for streaming. Up to three settings can
be preset.
Item
Description
On/Off
Switches streaming On/Off
transmission on/off.
Preset
Type
Size
Bit Rate
Destination
Address
Selects the preset
from Preset 1 to
Preset 3. You can
edit Preset by
tapping Edit.
Setting
Preset1/Preset2/
Preset3
Selects the type of MPEG-2 TS/UDP/
video for streaming. MPEG-2 TS/
RTP
Sets the size of
video for streaming.
When HD Auto is
selected, the size is
set to 1920×1080 or
1280×720,
according to the
setting of the
recording format
recorded on the
SxS memory card or
the format of the
clip to be played
back.
HD Auto/
1280×720/
640×360/
480×270
Sets the bit rate of
video for streaming.
The selectable bit
rate varies
depending on the
Size setting.
9Mbps/
6Mbps/
3Mbps/
2Mbps/
1Mbps/
0.5Mbps
Item
Description
Setting
Destination
Port
Enter the port
number of the
transmission
destination server
used for streaming.
1 to 65535
Audio
Channel
Select
Selects the audio
channels for the
streaming output.
Ch-1 & Ch-2/
Ch-3 & Ch-4
Use this screen to make settings for connecting
the camcorder to a wireless LAN.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When Streaming is set to On, the monitoring function
cannot be used.
ˎˎ Audio/video data is transmitted as-is via the Internet.
Accordingly, the data may potentially be exposed to other
parties.
Always check that the transmission destination can
receive the streaming data.
The data may be sent to an unintended party if the
address or other settings are configured incorrectly.
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played, depending on the status of
the network.
ˎˎ The picture quality may deteriorate in scenes with
excessive motion.
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played when the stream is set to a
large size with a small bit rate.
To reduce this, select a smaller size for the Size setting.
Proxy Format Settings
You can set the format of the proxy file that is
recorded on the SD card of the camcorder.
Enter the address of Host name or IP
address
the transmission
destination server
for streaming data.
Video
ˎˎXAVC Proxy (AVC/H.264 Main Profile, 4:2:0 Long
GOP)
ˎˎSize is selected in the following settings.
Audio
ˎˎAAC-LC compression
ˎˎSampling frequency: 48 kHz
ˎˎBit rate: 128 kbps for stereo
Wireless LAN Station Settings
Item
Description
Setting
Proxy File
recording
>Size
Sets the video size
and bit rate for
proxy files.
1280×720(9Mbps)/
1280×720(6Mbps)/
640×360(3Mbps)/
480×270(1Mbps)/
480×270(0.5Mbps)
Proxy File
recording
>Frame
Rate
Displays the video 23.98fps/
frame rate for proxy 25fps/
29.97fps/
files.
50fps/
59.94fps
Proxy File
recording
>Bit Rate
Displays the video
bit rate for proxy
files.
9Mbps(VBR)/
6Mbps(VBR)/
3Mbps(VBR)/
1Mbps(VBR)/
0.5Mbps(VBR)
Proxy File
recording
>Audio
Channel
Select
Sets the audio
channel to record
to proxy data.
Ch-1 & Ch-2/
Ch-3 & Ch-4
Item
Description
Host Name
Name of the camcorder (can be
modified)
SSID
Displays the SSID selected in
[Access Point].
Key
Enter the password for the
access point.
DHCP
Enables/disables DHCP.
When set to [On], an IP address
is automatically assigned to the
camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP
address manually, set to [Off].
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the
camcorder. Enabled only when
DHCP is [Off].
Subnet mask
Enter the subnet mask of the
camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
Gateway
Enter the gateway for the access
point.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
DNS Auto
Obtains DNS address
automatically.
When set to On, the address of
the DNS server is obtained
automatically.
[Notes]
ˎˎ The bit rate is an average value, so this value may be
exceeded at times.
ˎˎ 24 fps is not supported.
000
69
5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu
Item
Description
Primary DNS
Server
Enter the primary DNS server for
the access point.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
Secondary DNS
Server
Enter the secondary DNS server
for the access point.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
Submit
Checking wireless LAN settings
Use the Wireless LAN >Status tab to monitor the
wireless LAN status.
The displayed settings will vary depending on the
wireless LAN mode of the camcorder.
Access point mode
Applies the wireless LAN
settings.
Connecting to an access point in station mode
without using WPS
1 Connect the camcorder and device using
access point mode (page 57).
Item
Description
DHCP
Enables/disables DHCP.
When set to [On], an IP address
is automatically assigned to the
camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP
address manually, set to [Off].
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the
camcorder.
Enabled when DHCP is [Off].
Subnet mask
Enter the subnet mask of the
camcorder. Enabled when
DHCP is [Off].
Gateway
Enter the gateway for the access
point.
Enabled when DHCP is [Off].
DNS Auto
Obtains DNS address
automatically.
When set to On, the address of
the DNS server is obtained
automatically.
Station mode
2 Configure settings on the Station Settings
screen.
Configure settings to match the settings of the
access point connection.
Primary DNS
Server
Enter the primary DNS server of
the router.
Enabled when DNS Auto is [Off].
For details about access point settings, refer to the
instruction manual for the access point.
Secondary DNS
Server
Enter the secondary DNS server
of the router.
Enabled when DHCP is [Off].
Web/Cam
Remote
Enables/disables access to the
camcorder web menu and Wi-Fi
remote control.
When set to On, access is
permitted.
3 Tap [Submit].
The specified settings are applied.
4 Select Maintenance >Network >Wireless
Network in the setup menu.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Wi-Fi Station],
then press the knob.
This step connects the camcorder to the
access point in station mode. Proceed to step
9 in “Connecting to an access point using WPS”
(page 58) to access the camcorder from the
device.
Wired LAN Settings
Use this screen to make settings for connecting
the camcorder to a wired LAN.
Submit
[Note]
Sets the wired LAN settings.
To prevent unauthorized access from the Internet, it is
recommended that Web/Cam Remote be set to On only
when the wired LAN network is not connected to the
Internet. When connecting to the Internet, check that the
network connection is a secure network before use.
Checking wired LAN settings
Use the Wired LAN >Status tab to monitor the
wired LAN status.
Transfer (Upload) Settings
You can register and set servers for transferring
proxy files or original files recorded on the
camcorder.
Auto transfer ON/OFF
If [Auto upload] is [On] and an Internet connection
exists, proxy files are automatically transferred to
the default server specified on the Upload Settings
tab when recording ends.
The default server is set to “Sony Ci” by factory
default.
“Sony Ci” is the Media Cloud Services provided by
Sony. You can transfer files to the “Sony Ci” cloud
service.
000
70
5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu
[Notes]
ˎˎ A subscription is required in order to use the “Sony Ci”
cloud service. For details, visit www.SonyMCS.com/
wireless.
ˎˎ The name of the transfer destination folder is specified in
[Destination Directory]. If not specified, a folder name with
the current date is used. To change the setting, see “To
change registered server settings” (page 70).
To register a new destination server
To change registered server settings
Tap [Create New] to display a configuration screen.
Select the server whose settings you want to
change on the Upload Settings screen, then
tap [Edit]. Change the setting on the displayed
configuration screen.
For details about items, see To register a new
destination server.
Use the following procedure to register with “Sony
Ci.”
Deleting a registered server
1 Check that “Sony Ci” is displayed on the
[Upload Settings] tab, then click [Edit].
The “Sony Ci” setup screen appears.
2 Enter a user name and password.
For details, visit www.SonyMCS.com/wireless.
After specifying settings, tap [OK] to apply the
settings. Tapping [Cancel] discards the settings.
Item
Description
Default Server
Set to [On] to set the default
file destination server.
(Displayed at the top of the
server list for file transfers.)
Display Name
Enter the name of the server
to display in the list.
Service
Displays the type of server.
FTP: FTP server
Host Name
Enter the address of the server.
User
Enter the user name.
Password
Enter the password.
PASV Mode
Enable/disable PASV mode.
Destination
Directory
Specify the destination
directory.
3 Tap [Link].
A completion message appears after a short
while.
[Link] associates the user with the camcorder.
An Internet connection is required to execute
[Link].
4 Tap [OK].
After registering with “Sony Ci,” [Unlink]
appears on the Settings screen. Tapping
[Unlink] releases the user account to enable
other user accounts to link with the
camcorder.
Select the server you want to delete on the Upload
Settings screen, then tap [Delete]. A confirmation
message appears. Tap [OK] to delete the server
and return to the previous screen.
Monitoring File Transfers (Job List)
You can monitor file transfer status, manage files in
the transfer file list, and start/stop file transfers.
The camcorder supports the FTP resume function
(for continuing file transfer if transfer stops).
[Note]
If an invalid character is entered
in the directory name, the
directory is not created and files
are transferred to the top level of
the default transfer destination
directory.
Using Secure
Protocol
[Note]
Set whether to use secure FTP.
Communication using FTP is not encrypted. The use of FTPS
is recommended.
Item
Description
Total
Progress status of the transfer
of all files
Status
Progress status of the file
being transferred
Remain time
Predicted remaining transfer
time
Transfer data rate
Transfer rate
To stop/restart file transfer or delete a file from
the transfer list
1 Select a file.
2 Tap on the top right of the screen.
Select a menu item.
ˎˎAbort selected: Stop file transfer.
ˎˎDelete from list: Delete the file from the
transfer list.
ˎˎStart selected: Start file transfer.
ˎˎSelect All: Select all files in the list.
ˎˎClear completed: Delete all files that have
been transferred from the list.
000
71
5. Network Configuration
Supported Network Functions and Operating Limitations
Network Functions and Network Connection Settings
Limitations on Simultaneous Use of Network Functions
The supported network functions and corresponding network connection settings (Maintenance
>Network >Wireless Network and Wired LAN settings) are shown below.
To enable the network functions, set Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup menu to On.
The following limitations apply to the simultaneous use of network functions.
Network function
Maintenance >Network>Wireless Network in the
setup menu
Maintenance >Network
>Wired LAN in the setup
menu
Wireless LAN connection
Wired LAN
connection
Operation
None
Disabled
Network function stopped
USB wireless LAN module
Disabled
USB wireless LAN module operating
3G/4G/LTE USB modem
Disabled
3G/4G/LTE USB modem operating
Wi-Fi Access Point
Wi-Fi Station
Modem
Off
Enable
Disable
Proxy recording (page 51)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Proxy playback
(page 67)
Yes2)
Yes 2)
No
No
Yes 2)
No
1) Streaming and file transfer operate using wired LAN. The USB wireless LAN module is reserved for Wi-Fi remote control
operation.
File transfer
(page 62)
No
Yes 2)
Yes 2)
No
Yes 2)
No
[Note]
Streaming
transmission
(page 63)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Monitoring
(page 67)
Yes 2)
Yes 2)
No
No
Yes 2)
No
Network client mode
(page 64)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Camcorder remote
control
(page 65)
Yes 2)
Yes 2)
No
No
Yes 2)
No
1)
1) Proxy recording is enabled when Operation >Proxy Recording Mode> Setting in the setup menu is set to On.
2) Supports camcorder and network-connected device functions.
None
Enabled
Wired LAN operating
USB wireless LAN module
Enabled
USB wireless LAN module and wired LAN operating 1)
Wired LAN connection is not possible when the USB extension adaptor of the CBK-NA1R Ethernet Adaptor, supplied with the
CBK-NA1 (option), is attached to the USB wireless LAN module on the camcorder.
000
72
6. Clip Operations
Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
Thumbnail Screen
Cursor
(yellow)
1
2
3
4
5
6
78
OK S
9
The thumbnail screen appears if you press the
THUMBNAIL button in E-E or playback mode.
Thumbnail screens display lists of the index
pictures of clips stored on SxS memory cards as
thumbnails. (A message appears if you insert a
memory card that contains no clips.)
You can select any clip (page 73) on the
thumbnail screen and start playback of that clip
(page 73).
You can also add a clip flag to any clip on the
thumbnail screen to filter clips according to the
flags. You can also switch to the Essence Mark
thumbnail screen from the thumbnail screen and
add essence marks (for example, shot marks) to
any frame in the clip.
10
11
To hide the thumbnail screen, press the
THUMBNAIL button.
1. Thumbnail (index picture)
When a clip is recorded, its first frame is
automatically displayed as the index picture.
You can change the index picture to any frame
(page 76).
2. Selected media icon/media status
A
mark is displayed if the media is protected.
If two SxS memory cards are inserted in the
camcorder, you can switch between them using
the SLOT SELECT button.
12
13
[Note]
You cannot switch between SxS memory cards while the
Essence Mark thumbnail screen is displayed.
3. Clip number / total number of clips
4. Battery / Voltage status
5. Playback disabled indicator
6. Clip status
Displays the clips status using an icon.
Icon
Meaning
S, OK, NG, KP
icons
Essence mark or clip flag attached
to a clip
Lock icon
Clip is locked (protected)
7. Clip select checkbox
Place a check mark in the checkbox to select a clip
(thumbnail).
8. Thumbnail information
Displays thumbnail information. The displayed
information varies according to the Customize
View setting (page 77).
9. Clip name / title
Displays the name or title of the selected clip.
10. Recording video format
11. Special recording information
Displays the recording mode if the clip was
recorded using a special recording mode (Slow &
000
73
6.Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
Quick Motion).
For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the [Recording
frame rate/Playback frame rate] are displayed on
the right.
12. Clip duration
13. Creation date
Selecting Clips
To select a clip thumbnail, do one of the following
to move the yellow cursor to the thumbnail that
you want to select.
ˎˎPress the , , ,  buttons.
ˎˎTurn the MENU knob.
ˎˎPress the PREV or NEXT button.
Playing Clips Sequentially Starting
from the Selected Clip
1 Select the thumbnail of the clip that you want
to play first.
Press and hold the F REV button, and press the
PREV button.
Selecting the Last Thumbnail
Press and hold the F FWD button, and press the
NEXT button.
Jumping to the Last Clip
Press the F FWD button (page 8) or the F REV
button (page 7).
To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/
PAUSE button.
Simultaneously press the F FWD and NEXT
buttons. This jumps to the last frame of the last clip
recorded on the SxS memory card.
2 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
Playback begins from the start of the selected
clip.
It plays all clips sequentially starting from the
selected clip.
After the last clip has been played, the camcorder
enters pause (still image) mode at the last frame of
the last clip.
Press the THUMBNAIL button to return to the
thumbnail screen.
[Notes]
Selecting the First Thumbnail
Playing at High Speed
ˎˎ Not all clips may be played back sequentially if the clips
on the SxS memory cards were recorded with a mixture of
different recording formats.
ˎˎ Clips with an playback disabled icon (page 72)
displayed on the thumbnail screen are not played. The
corresponding clips are skipped and sequential playback
continues.
ˎˎ There may be momentary picture breakup or still image
display at the boundary between clips. During this time,
the play controls and the THUMBNAIL button cannot be
operated.
ˎˎ When you select a clip in the thumbnail screen and begin
playback, there may be momentary picture breakup at
the start of the clip. To view the start of the clip without
breakup, put the camcorder into playback mode, pause,
use the PREV button to return to the start of the clip, and
start play again.
Pausing Playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes while play is
paused.
Press the button again to return to play mode.
Returning to the Start of the Current
Clip
Press the PREV button.
ˎˎDuring playback or F FWD, this jumps to the
start of the current clip and starts playback.
ˎˎDuring F REV or pause, this jumps to the start of
the current clip and displays a still image.
ˎˎEach subsequent press of the button moves to
the previous clip.
Adding a Shot Mark during Playback
You can add shot marks to clips during playback
by using the same method used during recording
(page 47).
[Notes]
ˎˎ Shot marks cannot be recorded when the SxS memory
card is write protected.
ˎˎ Shot marks cannot be added to the first frame of each clip
or the last frame of the last clip.
Stopping Playback
Playing from the Start of the First Clip
Simultaneously press the PREV and F REV buttons.
This jumps to the start of the first clip on the SxS
memory card.
Jumping to the Start of the Next Clip
Press the NEXT button.
ˎˎDuring playback or F FWD, this jumps to the
start of the next clip and starts playback.
ˎˎDuring F REV or pause, this jumps to the start of
the next clip and displays a still image.
ˎˎEach subsequent press of the button moves to
the next clip.
Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and the
camcorder enters E-E mode.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback stops and
the thumbnail screen (page 72) appears in
the viewfinder.
Play also stops if you eject the memory card. In this
case, the camera picture appears in the viewfinder.
000
74
6.Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
Basic Thumbnail Menu Operations
The Thumbnail menu is used to protect/delete
clips, check properties, add/delete clip flags and
essence marks to frames in a clip, and other tasks.
1 Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears.
2 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or press
the MENU button.
The menu screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Thumbnail],
then press the knob.
You can also press the  or  button to select
[Thumbnail], and press the SET button.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When an SxS memory card is write protected, it is not
possible to copy, delete, change index pictures, or add
and delete clip flags marks and shot marks.
ˎˎ Some items cannot be selected, depending on the state
when the menu was displayed.
For details about the thumbnail screen structure,
see “Thumbnail Menu” (page 77).
Protecting Clips
You can protect a specified clip or all clips to
protect the clips from being deleted.
is added to the thumbnails of protected clips.
Clips can be protected on the thumbnail screen or
the filtered clip thumbnail screen (page 76).
Protecting a specific clip
1 Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Select
Clip in the setup menu.
To hide the Thumbnail menu, press the MENU
button again.
To select a menu item/sub-item, do one of the
following.
ˎˎTurn the MENU knob to select an item or subitem, then press the knob.
ˎˎPress the arrow buttons (, , , ) to select
an item or sub-item, then press the SET button.
A selection list or a clip properties screen appears
(page 75) according to the selected item or
sub-item.
To return to the previous screen, push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE
position.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
The clip selection screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to protect,
then press the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected clip.
4 Simultaneously press the SET button and SHIFT
button.
A confirmation screen appears.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
The clip is protected, and a completion
message appears.
6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
Protecting all clips
1 Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Lock All
Clips in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
All clips are protected, and a completion
message appears.
4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
Unlocking all clips
1 Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Unlock
All Clips in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
All clips are unlocked, and a completion
message appears.
[Notes]
ˎˎIf a clip with the same name already exists at the
copy destination SxS memory card, a one-digit
number in parentheses is added to the original
name.
The number in parentheses is the smallest
number that does not exist at the copy
destination.
Example:
ABCD0002ABCD0002(1)
ABCD0002(1)ABCD0002(2)
ABCD0005(3)ABCD0005(4)
ˎˎIf the parenthetical numbers (1) to (999) already
exist at the copy destination, because a clip
has been copied more than 1000 times, it is
not possible to copy any more clips under that
name.
ˎˎA message appears if there is not enough free
space on the copy destination SxS memory card.
Exchange the card for one with more free space.
ˎˎWhen multiple clips are recorded on the source
SxS memory card, it may not be possible to copy
all clips even when the source and destination
memory cards have the same capacity,
depending on the memory characteristics and
usage of the memory cards.
Copying a specific clip
1 Select Thumbnail >Copy Clip >Select Clip in
the setup menu.
4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
Copying Clips
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to copy,
You can copy clips to another SxS memory card.
Clips are copied to destination SxS memory cards
using the same names as the original clips.
4 Simultaneously press the SET button and SHIFT
press the knob.
The clip selection screen appears.
then press the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected clip.
button.
A confirmation screen appears.
000
75
6.Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
The clip is copied, and a completion message
appears.
6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
Copying all clips
You can copy all clips stored on the same SxS
memory card at the same time to another SxS
memory card.
1 Select Thumbnail >Copy Clip >All Clips in the
setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
All clips are copied, and a completion message
appears.
4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to delete,
then press the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected clip.
4 Simultaneously press the SET button and SHIFT
button.
A confirmation screen appears.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
The clip is deleted, and a completion message
appears.
You can delete clips from SxS memory cards. Clips
can be deleted on the thumbnail screen or the
filtered clip thumbnail screen (page 76).
1 Select Thumbnail >Delete Clip >Select Clip in
the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
The clip selection screen appears.
The clip properties screen for the selected clip appears when you select Thumbnail >Display Clip
Properties in the setup menu.
1
4
OK S
2
5
3
6
7
6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
The clips below the deleted clip on the thumbnail
screen move up one position.
Deleting all clips
You can delete all clips stored on the same SxS
memory card at the same time.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Deleted clips cannot be restored.
ˎˎ If the media or clip is protected, this function is disabled.
1 Select Thumbnail >Delete Clip >All Clips in the
setup menu.
Deleting Clips
Displaying Clip Properties
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
All clips are deleted, and a completion
message appears.
4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
1. Current clip image
Displays the index picture and status of the
selected clip.
2. Timecode display
TC Index: Timecode of the displayed image
Start: Timecode of the recording start point
End: Timecode of the recording end point
Duration: Duration between start and end points
3. Creation date and modified date
Press the RESET/RETURN button: Returns to the
Thumbnail menu screen.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Sets the camcorder
to E-E mode and displays the camera picture.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button: Starts playback of
the selected clip.
Adding Clip Flags to Clips
4. Clip name
5. Recording format
Video Codec: Video codec
Size: Picture size
FPS: Frame rate
Audio Codec: Audio codec
Ch/Bit: Audio recording channel/Number of bits
for audio recording
6. Special recording information
7. Recording device name
To hide the clip properties screen, do one of the
following.
You can add clip flags (OK, NG or KP marks) to clips
to filter the display of clips based on the clip flags.
You can perform this operation on the thumbnail
screen or the filtered clip thumbnail screen
(page 76).
1 Select the thumbnail for the clip to which you
want to add the clip flag, then select
Thumbnail >Set Clip Flag in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip flag, then
press the knob.
000
76
6.Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
Setting
Added clip flag
Add OK
OK
Add NG
NG
Add KEEP
KP
The clip flag is added to the thumbnail of the
selected clip.
You can also use an assignable switch assigned
with the clip flag function to add clip flags
(page 106).
filtered by the selected clip flag. This screen is
referred to as the filtered clip screen.
Adding/Deleting Essence Marks on
Clips
You can add (and delete) essence marks (shot
marks, recording start marks) to any frame in a clip.
You add/delete essence marks on the essence
mark thumbnail screen.
3 Select the thumbnail for the frame from which
you want to delete a shot mark on the essence
mark thumbnail screen, then select Thumbnail
>Set Shot Mark in the setup menu.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select one of the
following, then press the knob.
Setting
Operation
Delete Shot Mark1
Deletes Shot Mark 1
Delete Shot Mark2
Deletes Shot Mark 2
The shot mark is deleted from the selected
frame.
Deleting a Clip Flag
Adding a shot mark
1 Select the thumbnail for the clip from which
1 Select Thumbnail > Thumbnail View > Essence Filtering Clips (Frames) using the
Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu.
you want to delete a clip flag, then select
Thumbnail >Set Clip Flag >Delete Clip Flag in
the setup menu.
The clip flag is deleted.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [All], and then
press the knob.
3 Select the thumbnail for the frame to which
Filtering the Clips Displayed using the
Filtered Clip Screen
1 Select Thumbnail >Filter Clips in the setup
menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip flag used
to filter clips, then press the knob.
Setting
Filter clip flag
OK
OK
NG
NG
KEEP
KP
None
(Clips are not filtered)
The clip screen appears showing the clips
you want to add the essence mark on the
essence mark thumbnail screen, then select
Thumbnail >Set Shot Mark in the setup menu.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select one of the
following, then press the knob.
Setting
Operation
Add Shot Mark1
Adds Shot Mark 1
Add Shot Mark2
Adds Shot Mark 2
The shot mark is added to the selected frame.
Deleting a shot mark
1 Select Thumbnail > Thumbnail View > Essence
Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu.
2 Select the type of shot mark to delete.
Essence Mark Thumbnail Screen
The essence mark thumbnail screen displays only
those frames in a clip where an essence mark has
been recorded in thumbnail view. Display the
thumbnail screen, then either press the ESSENCE
MARK button (page 9) or use the following
procedure to display the essence mark thumbnail
screen.
1 Select Thumbnail >Thumbnail View >Essence
Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an essence
mark used to filter frames, then press the knob.
Setting
Description
All
All frames with added essence
marks
Rec Start
Frames with a recording start
mark and the first frame of
clips that do not have a
recording start mark
Setting
Description
Shot Mark0 to
Shot Mark9
Frames with each shot mark
The essence mark thumbnail screen appears
filtered by the selected essence mark.
If a clip is recorded using planning metadata that
defines names for shot mark 0 to shot mark 9, the
selection options in the list are displayed by the
defined names.
Changing the Index Picture of a Clip
You can set the frame selected on the essence
mark thumbnail screen as the index picture for the
clip.
Select the thumbnail of the frame you want to
set as the index picture for the clip, then select
Thumbnail >Set Index Picture in the setup menu.
000
77
6.Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
Thumbnail Menu
Default values are shown in bold.
Item
Sub-item setting
Description
Display Clip Properties
–
Displays clip properties (page 75).
Set Index Picture
–
Sets/changes the index picture of a clip
(page 76).
Thumbnail View
Changes the thumbnail
screen displayed.
Displays the essence mark thumbnail screen
Essence Mark Thumbnail
All/Rec Start/Shot Mark1/Shot with clips filtered by essence mark (page 76).
Mark2/Shot Mark3/Shot Mark4/
Shot Mark5/Shot Mark6/Shot
Mark7/Shot Mark8/Shot Mark9/
Shot Mark0
Clip Thumbnail
Displays the thumbnail screen (clip thumbnail
screen) (page 72).
Add Shot Mark1
Adds Shot Mark 1 to a frame (page 76).
Delete Shot Mark1
Deletes Shot Mark 1 (page 76).
Add Shot Mark2
Adds Shot Mark 2 to a frame (page 76).
Delete Shot Mark2
Deletes Shot Mark 2 (page 76).
Add OK
Adds an OK flag to a clip (page 75).
Add NG
Adds an NG flag to a clip (page 75).
Add KEEP
Adds a KP (Keep) flag to a clip (page 75).
Delete Clip Flag
Deletes a clip flag (page 76).
Select Clip
Selects the clip to protect (page 74).
Lock All Clips
Protects all clips on the media (page 74).
Unlock All Clips
Unlocks all clips on the media (page 74).
Copy Clip
Copies clips.
Select Clip
Selects the clip to copy (page 74).
All Clips
Copies all clips on the media (page 75).
Delete Clip
Deletes clips.
Select Clip
Selects the clip to delete (page 75).
All Clips
Deletes all clips on the media (page 75).
Set Shot Mark
Adds/deletes shot marks.
Set Clip Flag
Adds/deletes clip flags.
Lock/Unlock Clip
Protects/unlocks a clip.
Item
Sub-item setting
Description
Filter Clips
Filters the display of clips
by clip flag.
OK
Filters the display of clips by OK flags
(page 76).
NG
Filters the display of clips by NG flags
(page 76).
KEEP
Filters the display of clips by KP (Keep) flags
(page 76).
None
Thumbnail Caption
Date Time/Time Code/
Duration/Sequential
Number
Clips are not filtered (page 76).
Selects the information displayed beneath clip
thumbnails.
Date Time: Displays the date and time.
Time Code: Displays the timecode.
Duration: Displays the duration of the clip.
Sequential Number: Displays a sequential
number for each clip.
Customize View
000
78
7. Menu Display and Settings
Setup Menu Organization
On this camcorder, settings for shooting and
playback are made in the setup menu, which
appears in the viewfinder.
The setup menu can also be displayed on an
external video monitor (page 118).
Menu Structure
User menu
Menu used to arrange items from the setup
menu in any chosen order (page 82).
Operation menu
Menu used to make settings related to
shooting (excluding settings related to picture
quality).
Paint menu
Menu used to make settings related to picture
quality.
Thumbnail menu
Menu used to make settings related to clip
thumbnails (page 77).
[Note]
The Thumbnail menu can be used only when a
thumbnail screen (page 72) is displayed. It is disabled
when the thumbnail screen is not displayed.
Maintenance Menu
Menu used to make settings related to
camcorder maintenance and system
management.
File menu
Menu used to make perform operations on
files.
Menu Items
Operation menu
Item
Description
Planning
Metadata
Planning metadata
settings
Page
91
Paint menu
Item
Description
Format
System settings
84
Item
Description
Format Media
Media format settings
84
Switch Status
92
Input/Output
Input/output signal
settings
85
Correction functions and
test signal on/off
settings
Super Impose
Superimposition settings
85
White
Color temperature
settings
92
LCD
LCD monitor settings
85
Black
Black level settings
92
Rec Function
Special recording mode
settings
85
Flare
Flare correction settings
92
Gamma
Gamma correction
settings
92
Black Gamma
Black gamma correction
settings
93
Page
Page
Proxy Recording Proxy data settings
Mode
86
Assignable
Switch
Assign functions to
assignable switches
87
Knee
Knee correction settings
93
VF Setting
Viewfinder settings
87
White Clip
White clip settings
93
Marker
Marker settings
87
Detail(HD)
Detail settings
94
88
Detail(SD)
Detail settings
94
Aperture
Aperture correction
settings
94
Gain Switch
Gain value settings
Auto Iris
Auto iris settings
88
Zebra
Zebra pattern settings
88
Display On/Off
Viewfinder display item
settings
88
Skin Detail
Skin detail correction
settings
94
“!” LED
Viewfinder “!” settings
89
Matrix
Matrix correction
settings
94
White Setting
White balance settings
90
Multi Matrix
95
Offset White
Offset white settings
90
Multi matrix correction
settings
Shutter
Shutter settings
90
V Modulation
95
Slow Shutter
Slow shutter settings
90
V modulation shading
correction settings
Time Zone
Time settings
90
Low Key
Saturation
Low key saturation
correction settings
95
Clip
Clip settings
91
Update media
management
information
91
Saturation
Mode
Saturation correction
settings
95
Update Media
Noise
Suppression
Noise suppression
settings
96
Location information
(GPS) settings
91
GPS
000
79
7. Menu Display and Settings: Setup Menu Organization
Maintenance menu
Item
Description
White Shading
White shading
correction settings
96
Black Shading
Black shading correction
settings
96
Battery
Battery settings
97
DC Voltage
Alarm
External DC source
voltage alarm settings
97
Audio
Audio settings
97
WRR Setting
Wireless tuner settings
98
Timecode
Timecode settings
99
Essence Mark
Essence mark settings
99
Camera Config
Camcorder operation
settings
99
Preset White
Preset white settings
100
White Filter
Filter settings
100
DCC Adjust
DCC settings
100
Flicker Reduce
Flicker correction
settings
101
Genlock
Genlock settings
101
Auto Shading
Auto black shading
correction settings
101
Page
APR
APR settings
101
Basic
Authentication
Basic authentication
settings
101
Network
Network connection
settings
101
Network Client
Mode
Network client mode
settings
102
File Transfer
Wi-Fi transfer settings
102
Streaming
Streaming settings
102
Clock Set
Internal clock settings
103
Language
Display language
settings
103
Hours Meter
Digital time counter
settings
103
Item
Description
Network Reset
Network reset
103
Fan Control
Fan control settings
103
VF Display
Setting
Viewfinder display
settings
103
Version
Version settings
103
Page
File menu
Item
Description
User File
User file settings
104
All File
ALL file settings
104
Scene File
Scene file settings
104
Reference File
Reference file settings
104
Page
Lens File
Lens file settings
105
User Gamma
Gamma file settings
105
000
80
7. Menu Display and Settings
Basic Setup Menu Operations
Displaying the Setup Menu
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or press the
MENU button.
The camcorder enters menu mode and the menu
list appears on the screen.
ˎˎThe menu item selection area displays a
maximum of seven lines. You can scroll
through menus with more than seven lines
by moving the cursor up and down.
4 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or 
button, to move the cursor to the sub-item
that you want to set, and then confirm by
pressing the MENU knob or the SET button.
The settings of the selected sub-item appear,
and the cursor moves to the currently selected
value.
Entering Text
When you select an item, such as a file name,
which requires character entry, the character entry
screen appears.
1
The following example shows the cursor
positioned at the Operation menu
Menu list
Displayed when there are further
menu items below.
Menu item selection area
ˎˎIf the selected item has sub-items,
they appear on the right.
ˎˎIf there are no sub-items, the current
setting appears on the right.
ˎˎSelect [Back] to return to the previous
level.
Menu item selection area
[Note]
The setup menu cannot be used when the camcorder is in
focus magnification mode. Exit focus magnification mode
by pressing the assignable switch to which the Focus Mag
function has been assigned.
3 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or 
button, to move the cursor to the menu item
that you want to set, and then confirm by
pressing the MENU knob or the SET button.
The sub-items area appears to the right of the
menu item selection area, and the cursor
moves to the first sub-item.
Making Menu Settings
1 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or 
button, to move the cursor to the desired
menu.
A list of selectable menu items appears in the
menu item selection area to the right of the
menu list.
2 Press the MENU knob or the SET button.
The menu item selection screen appears.
You can also display the menu item selection
screen by pressing the  button.
Settings area
ˎˎDisplays sub-items and their current settings
ˎˎTo return to the previous level, select [Back],
press the  button, or push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the
ESCAPE position.
Settings area
ˎˎThe settings area displays a maximum of
nine lines. You can scroll through menus
with more than nine sub-items by moving
the cursor up and down.
ˎˎFor sub-items with a large settings range (for
example, –99 to +99), the settings area is not
displayed. The current setting is highlighted
to indicate that the value can be changed.
2
3
1 Press the MENU knob to select the type of
character to enter, then press the MENU knob
or SET button.
ABC: Uppercase alphabetic characters
abc: Lowercase alphabetic characters
123: Numeric characters
!#$: Special characters
5 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or 
2 Select a character from the selected character
If an item requires confirmation before execution,
selecting the item in step 3 hides the menu and
a confirmation message appears. Follow the
instructions in the message to execute or cancel
the operation.
3 When finished, select [Done] and press the
button, to select the value to set, and then
confirm by pressing the MENU knob or the SET
button.
The setting is changed, and the display is
updated to show the new setting.
If you select [Execute] for an executable item,
the corresponding function is executed.
type, then press the knob.
The cursor moves to the next field.
Space: Enters a space character at the cursor
position.
/: Moves the position of the cursor.
BS: Deletes the character on the left of the
cursor (backspace).
dial.
The character string is confirmed and the
character entry screen disappears.
000
81
7. Menu Display and Settings: Basic Setup Menu Operations
Canceling Changes to Settings
1 Push the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch
down to the ESCAPE position.
Exiting the Menu
1 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or press
the MENU button.
The normal camera picture reappears.
000
82
7. Menu Display and Settings
Editing the User Menu
You can edit the User menu, such as adding items,
deleting items, and rearranging items, to make the
User menu more useful using Edit User Menu.
You can select any item in the Operation menu,
Paint menu, or Maintenance menu and add it to
the User menu.
Up to 20 items can be registered in the User menu.
There are six items registered in the User menu
by factory default, one of which must always be
present, allowing you to add up to 19 new items.
Displaying the Edit User Menu Screen
You edit the User menu on the Edit User Menu
screen.
1 Turn the MENU knob to select User >Edit User
Menu, then press the knob.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item, then
press the knob.
A screen for selecting sub-items to add
appears.
The Edit Sub Item screen appears.
Moving Items
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a sub-item, then
press the knob.
Place a check mark in the All checkbox to add
all sub-items.
Place a check mark in the individual
checkboxes to specify which sub-items to add.
The item is deleted.
All sub-items are checked when the screen is
first opened (function to display all sub-items).
Remove the check marks for the sub-items you
do not want to display in the User menu.
1 Display the Edit User Menu screen.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item to
move, then press the knob.
The edit function list appears.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [OK], then press 4 Turn the MENU knob to select [OK], then press
3 Turn the MENU knob to select Move in the edit
the knob.
the knob.
The item/sub-item(s) are added.
Editing is completed.
function list, then press the knob.
[Note]
The same item or sub-item cannot be registered twice. Also,
the name of the item or sub-item cannot be changed.
Deleting Items
The Edit User Menu screen appears.
Editing Sub-Items
You can specify the sub-items to display.
1 Display the Edit User Menu screen.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item to edit,
Adding Items and Sub-Items
1 Turn the MENU knob to select Edit User Menu
>Add Item, then press the knob.
The items that can be added are displayed.
then press the knob.
The edit function list appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select Edit Sub Item in
the edit function list, then press the knob.
1 Display the Edit User Menu screen.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item to edit,
The item to move is highlighted, and a triangle
mark and line indicate the destination position.
then press the knob.
The edit function list appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select Delete in the
edit function list, then press the knob.
Triangle mark and line indicating move
destination
000
83
7. Menu Display and Settings: Editing the User Menu
4 Turn the MENU knob to move the triangle and
line to the desired destination, then press the
knob.
The item is moved.
Restoring the User Menu to Factory
Default State
1 Turn the MENU knob to select Edit User Menu
>Customize Reset, then press the knob.
The Customize Reset screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Reset], then
press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
The User menu is restored to the factory
default state.
000
84
7. Menu Display and Settings
Menu List
User Menu (Factory Default Configuration)
Operation >Format
Sets the system frequency, recording mode, recording format, and recording aspect ratio.
The User menu consists of the following items when it is in the factory default state.
ˎˎFormat Media (page 84)
ˎˎRec Function (page 85)
ˎˎInput/Output (page 85)
ˎˎClip (page 91)
ˎˎAssignable Switch 1) (page 87)
ˎˎCamera Config 2) (page 99)
Item
Setting
Description
Rec Format
Settings vary according to the
system frequency setting.
Selects the recording format (execute by selecting
Execute).
XAVC-I 1080i
XAVC-I 720P
XAVC-L 50 1080P
XAVC-L 50 1080i
XAVC-L 50 720P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080i
XAVC-L 25 1080i
HD422 50 1080i
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
MPEG IMX 50
DVCAM
When the system frequency is 59.94 or 50.
XAVC-I 1080P
XAVC-L 50 1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080P
When the system frequency is 29.97, 25, or 23.98
Aspect Ratio (SD)
16:9/4:3
Selects the SD mode aspect ratio.
Audio Length
24bit/16bit
Selects the audio bit rate for recording in IMX
format.
1) Excluding sub-item 0
2) Contains only User Menu Only as sub-item
For details about editing the User menu, see “Editing the User Menu” (page 82).
Operation Menu
Default values are shown in bold.
Operation >Format
Sets the system frequency, recording mode, recording format, and recording aspect ratio.
Item
Setting
Description
Frequency
59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
Selects the system frequency (execute by
selecting Execute).
File System
exFAT/UDF
Switches the recording mode between exFAT and
UDF (execute by selecting Execute)
[Note]
UDF support is planned for a future release.
Operation >Format Media
Formats the media.
Item
Setting
Description
Media (A)
Execute/Cancel
Initializes the SxS memory card in slot A (execute
by selecting Execute).
Media (B)
Execute/Cancel
Initializes the SxS memory card in slot B (execute by
selecting Execute).
SD Card(Utility)
Execute/Cancel
Initializes the SD card in the UTILITY SD card slot
(execute by selecting Execute).
SD Card(Proxy)
Execute/Cancel
Initializes the SD card in the PROXY SD card slot
(execute by selecting Execute).
000
85
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Operation >Input/Output
Sets input/output signals.
Operation >Super Impose
Sets character information/markers to be superimposed.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Output Format
Settings vary according to the
system frequency setting.
Selects the input format (execute by selecting
Execute).
Settings vary according to the recording format
setting (page 84).
Super(VF Display)
On/Off
Super(Menu)
On/Off
Camera/External
Selects the camera picture (Camera) or SDI IN
connector input signal for the video input source.
When Input/Output >SDI Out2/HDMI Super or
Input/Output >Video Out Super is set to On, this
turns superimposition of character information on
the output from the SDI OUT connector or VIDEO
OUT connector, respectively.
Super(Marker)
On/Off
Source Select
When Input/Output >SDI Out2/HDMI Super or
Input/Output >Video Out Super is set to On, this
turns superimposition of markers on the output
from the SDI OUT connector or VIDEO OUT
connector on/off, respectively.
SDI Out1 Output
On/Off
Turns the output signal from the SDI OUT1
connector on/off.
SDI Out2 Output
On/Off
Turns the output signal from the SDI OUT2
connector on/off.
HDMI Output
On/Off
Turns the output signal from the HDMI connector
on/off.
Operation >LCD
Sets the LCD monitor.
SDI Out2/HDMI Super
Off/On
Turns character information (superimposed) from
the SDI OUT2 connector on/off.
Item
Setting
Description
LCD Color
–99 to ±0 to +99
Adjusts the color depth of the LCD monitor.
LCD Marker&Zebra
On/Off
Turns the marker and zebra pattern display on the
LCD monitor on/off.
Video Out Super
Off/On
Turns character information (superimposed) from
the VIDEO OUT connector on/off.
Down Converter
Edge Crop/Letter Box/Squeeze
Selects the signal conversion mode for output of
SD signals.
Edge Crop: Crops the edges of the 16:9 picture for
output as a 4:3 picture.
Letter Box: Masks the top and bottom of the 4:3
picture and displays a 16:9 picture in the
center of the screen.
Squeeze: Squeezes the 16:9 picture horizontally
for output as a 4:3 picture.
Wide ID
Through/Auto
Selects whether to add a wide ID signal to the SD
output signal.
Through: Outputs without adding a wide ID
signal.
Auto: Adds and outputs a wide ID signal to the
video signal when the wide ID signal is set to
Squeeze.
Wide Mode(Ext)
Auto/16:9
When the input signal is SD, sets the method that
determines wide screen information.
Auto: Records with 16:9 aspect ratio when the
wide screen information of the input signal is
Squeeze. Otherwise, records with 4:3 aspect
ratio.
16:9: Records with 16:9 aspect ratio.
Operation >Rec Function
Sets the special recording mode.
Item
Setting
Description
Slow & Quick Motion
On/Off
Turns Slow & Quick Motion on/off. (When set to
On, the settings for other special recording modes
are set to Off.)
000
86
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Operation >Rec Function
Sets the special recording mode.
Operation >Rec Function
Sets the special recording mode.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Frame Rate
Settings vary according to the
recording format setting.
When Slow & Quick Motion is On, selects the
frame rate for Slow & Quick Motion shooting.
Number of Frames
1 to 60
When the recording mode is exFAT, and the
recording format is XAVC Intra or XAVC Long.
The available settings vary
depending on the Format
>Frequency setting.
When Interval Rec is set to On, this sets the
number of frames to shoot in one Interval Rec
take.
2frames/6frames/12frames
1 to 50
When the recording mode is UDF, and the
recording format is MPEG2 HD 422 50M
(1280×720), 50P/25P.
When the recording format frame rate is 50P or
59.94P.
1frame/3frames/6frames/
9frames
When the recording format frame rate is 23.98P,
25P, 29.97P, 50i, or 59.94i.
Interval Time
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/20/30/
40/50 (sec)
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/20/30/
40/50/ (min)
1/2/3/4/6/12/24 (hour)
When Interval Rec is set to On, this sets the
interval for Interval Rec shooting.
Pre-Lighting
Off/2sec/5sec/10sec
Sets the number of seconds that the video light is
turned on prior to the start of Interval Rec
shooting. To not turn the video light on, select
Off.
Simul Rec
On/Off
Turns simultaneous recording to slots A and B on/
off.
[Note]
UDF support is planned for a future release.
1 to 30
When the recording mode is exFAT or UDF, and
the recording format is MPEG2 HD 422 50M
(1920×1080), 29.97P/23.98P.
[Note]
UDF support is planned for a future release.
1 to 25
When the recording mode is exFAT or UDF, and
the recording format is MPEG2 HD 422 50M
(1920×1080), 25P.
[Note]
UDF support is planned for a future release.
Clip Continuous Rec
On/Off
Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off. (When
set to On, the settings for other special recording
modes are set to Off.)
Operation >Proxy Recording Mode
Sets proxy recording.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns proxy recording on/off.
Size
1280×720(9Mbps)/
1280×720(6Mbps)/
640×360(3Mbps)/
480×270(1Mbps)/
480×270(0.5Mbps)
Selects the size of the proxy recording format.
Picture Cache Rec
On/Off
Turns picture cache recording mode on/off.
(When set to On, the settings for other special
recording modes are set to Off.)
Cache Rec Time
Settings vary according to the
recording format setting.
Sets the picture cache recording time, when
Picture Cache Rec is set to On.
0 to 2/2 to 4/4 to 6/6 to 8sec
When the recording format is AVC-I.
Frame Rate
0 to 2/2 to 4/4 to 6/6 to 8/
8 to 10/10 to 12/12 to 14/
13 to 15sec
When the recording format is XAVC-L, MPEG2 HD
422, MPEG2 HD 420, or MPEG IMX 50.
23.98fps/25fps/29.97fps/50fps/
59.94fps
Selects the frame rate of the proxy recording
format.
Bit Rate
9Mbps/6Mbps/3Mbps/1Mbps/
0.5Mbps
Selects the bit rate of the proxy recording format.
On/Off
Turns Interval Rec mode on/off. (When set to On,
the settings for other special recording modes are
set to Off.)
Audio Channel
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
Selects the audio channel to record to proxy data.
Interval Rec
000
87
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Operation >Assignable Switch
Assigns functions to assignable switches.
Operation >Marker
Sets the marker display in the viewfinder.
For details about assigning functions, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 106).
Item
Setting
Description
<0>
106
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 0 switch.
<1>
107
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 1 switch.
<2>
106
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 2 switch.
<3>
107
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 3 switch.
<4>
107
Assigns a function to the ASSIGNABLE 4 switch.
<5>
107
Assigns a function to the ASSIGNABLE 5 switch.
Lens RET
108
Assigns a function to RET button on the lens.
On Line
107
Assigns a function to the ONLINE button.
Zoom Speed
0 to 20 to 99
When Zoom has been assigned to the
ASSIGNABLE 4 or 5 switch, this sets the zoom
speed.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
[Note]
When Marker is assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 switch, this
setting is disabled.
Color
White/Yellow/Cyan/Green/
Magenta/Red/Blue
Selects the marker display color.
Center Marker
1/2/3/4/Off
When the center marker is displayed, selects the
type. Select Off if you do not want to display the
marker.
Safety Zone
On/Off
Turns the safety zone indicator on/off.
Safety Area
80%/90%/92.5%/95%
Selects the safety zone range.
Aspect Marker
Line/Mask/Off
When an aspect marker is to be displayed, selects
the display method. Select Off if you do not want
to display the marker.
Line: Show as white lines.
Mask: Displays a lower video signal level for areas
outside the marker area.
Aspect Select
15:9/14:9/13:9/4:3/1.66:1/
1.85:1/2.35:1/2.4:1
Selects the aspect ratio of the marker.
Aspect Mask
0% to 12% to 15%
When the Aspect Marker setting is Mask, this sets
the video signal level of areas outside the marker
area as a percentage value relative to the video
signal level of areas inside the marker area.
Aspect Safety Zone
On/Off
Turns the aspect safety zone marker on/off.
Aspect Safety Area
80%/90%/92.5%/95%
Selects the size of the aspect safety zone marker
(as a percentage of total screen size).
When Peaking Type is set to Normal, this selects
Normal or High peaking frequency (when using
CBK-VF02).
100% Marker
On/Off
Turns the 100% safety zone marker indicator on/
off.
User Box
On/Off
Turns the box cursor display on/off.
Selects the peaking color when Peaking Type is
set to Color (when using CBK-VF02).
B&W: Black & white
Red: Red
Yellow: Yellow
Blue: Blue
User Box Width
40 to 500 to 999
Sets the box cursor width (distance from the
center to the left and right edges).
User Box Height
70 to 500 to 999
Sets the box cursor height (distance from the
center to the top and bottom edges).
User Box H Position
–479 to 0 to 479
Sets the horizontal position of the box cursor
center.
User Box V Position
–464 to 0 to 464
Sets the vertical position of the box cursor center.
Operation >VF Setting
Sets the viewfinder screen.
Item
Setting
Description
Color
–99 to ±0 to +99
Adjusts the color depth of the viewfinder image.
Color Mode
Color/B&W
Selects the viewfinder display mode (when using
CBK-VF02).
Color: Color
B&W: Black & white
Peaking Type
Normal/Color
Selects the type of peaking (when using CBKVF02).
Normal: Normal peaking
Color: Color peaking
Peaking Frequency
Peaking Color
VF Detail Level
Normal/High
B&W/Red/Yellow/Blue
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the detail level (set on the camcorder) of the
viewfinder (when using HDVF-20A).
000
88
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Operation >Gain Switch
Sets the gain value switch settings.
Operation >Auto Iris
Sets the auto iris.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Gain<L>
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Selects the gain value for the L position of the
GAIN switch.
Iris APL Ratio
–99 to ±0 to +99
Gain<M>
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Selects the gain value for the M position of the
GAIN switch.
If the Mode setting for Auto Iris is set to Standard,
sets the mix ratio of peak to mean auto iris
detection value.
Iris Var Width
40 to 500 to 999
Gain<H>
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Selects the gain value for the H position of the
GAIN switch.
Sets the width of the window when Iris Window is
set to Var.
Iris Var Height
70 to 500 to 999
Gain <Turbo>
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Selects the gain value when the Turbo Gain
function is assigned to an assignable switch.
Sets the height of the window when Iris Window
is set to Var.
Iris Var H Position
–479 to 0 to 479
Shockless Gain
On/Off
Turns shockless gain (function that switches the
gain smoothly when the gain is switched) on/off.
Sets the horizontal position of the window when
Iris Window is set to Var.
Iris Var V Position
–464 to 0 to 464
Sets the vertical position of the window when Iris
Window is set to Var.
Operation >Zebra
Sets the display of zebra patterns.
Operation >Auto Iris
Sets the auto iris.
Item
Setting
Description
Iris Override
On/Off
Turns iris override (setting opens or closes the iris
more than normal) on/off.
Mode
Backlight/Standard/Spotlight
Selects the control mode of the auto iris.
Backlight: Backlight mode (mode for reduced
darkening of a subject when the subject is
backlit)
Standard: Standard mode (cannot be selected
when using optional remote control
connection)
Spotlight: Spotlight mode (mode for reduced
blown out highlights when subject is lit by
spotlighting)
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the convergence target level (larger values
increase brightness.)
Speed
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the control speed (speed of response to
changes in the video). (Larger values specify
quicker reaction times.)
Clip High light
On/Off
Turns the function that ignores brightest areas to
provide a flatter reaction to high luminance on/
off.
Detect Window
1/2/3/4/5/6/Var
Selects the type of auto iris detection window.
Var: Variable
Detect Window
Indication
On/Off
Turns the function that displays the auto iris
detection window frame using a marker on/off.
Item
Setting
Description
Zebra Select
1/2/Both
Selects the zebra pattern type (Zebra 1, Zebra 2,
Both).
Zebra1 Level
50% to 70% to 107%
Sets the Zebra 1 display level.
Zebra1 Aperture Level
1 to 10% to 20%
Sets the Zebra 1 aperture level.
Zebra2 Level
52% to 100% to 109%
Sets the Zebra 2 display level.
Operation >Display On/Off
Selects the items to display in the viewfinder.
Item
Setting
Description
Video Level Warning
On/Off
Turns the warnings that appear when the video
level is too bright or too dark on/off.
Shutter Setting
On/Off
Turns the shutter mode and shutter speed
indicators on/off.
ND Filter Position
On/Off
Turns the ND filter setting indicator on/off.
Gain Setting
On/Off
Turns the gain setting indicator on/off.
Rec/Play Status
On/Off
Turns the recording and playback indicators on/
off.
Color Temp.
On/Off
Turns the color temperature indicator on/off.
Frame Rate/Interval
On/Off
Turns the special recording mode indicator on/
off.
000
89
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Operation >Display On/Off
Selects the items to display in the viewfinder.
Operation >Display On/Off
Selects the items to display in the viewfinder.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Battery Remain
Auto/Voltage/Off
Sets the mode of the remaining battery capacity
and input voltage indicators.
Auto: Displays the remaining capacity, according
to the battery type.
Voltage: Displays the input voltage, regardless of
the battery type.
Off: No display.
Video Signal Monitor
Off/Waveform/Vector/Histogram Selects whether to display the video signal, and
the type of video signal to display.
[Note]
Not displayed in the following circumstances.
When Operation >Input/Output >SDI Out1 Select and
SDI Out2 Select in the setup menu are both set to Off.
When Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the
setup menu is set to 720×480P or 720×576P.
Timecode
On/Off
Turns the display of time data (timecode, user bits,
counter, duration) on/off.
Clip Name
On/Off
Turns the clip name display on/off.
Audio Level Meter
On/Off
Turns the display of the audio level meter on/off.
Focus Assist Indicator
On/Off
Turns the focus assist indicator on/off.
On/Off
Turns the focus area marker indicator on/off.
Media Status
On/Off
Turns the media status indicator on/off.
Focus Area Marker
SD Card(Utility)
On/Off
Turns the SD card (Utility) indicator on/off.
Lens Info
Meter/Feet/Off
Focus Position
Meter/Feet/Off
Turns the lens focus position indicator on/off and
selects the display units.
Selects whether to display depth of field and the
units to display.
WRR RF Level
On/Off
Iris Position
On/Off
Turns the lens iris position indicator on/off.
Turns the wireless tuner reception status indicator
on/off.
Zoom Position
On/Off
Turns the lens zoom position indicator on/off.
Clip Number
On/Off
Turns the clip information display on/off.
Extender
On/Off
Turns the lens and digital extender indicator on/
off.
Operation >"!"LED
Sets the “!” indicator in the viewfinder. (Enabled when using HDVF-20A).
ALAC
On/Off
Turns the lens aberration correction indicator on/
off.
Item
Setting
Description
Gain <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator, when
the gain is set to other than 0 dB, on/off.
Shutter <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator, when
the SHUTTER switch is set to ON, on/off.
White Preset <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator, when
the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, on/off.
ATW Run <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator, when
ATW is used, on/off.
Extender <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off,
when the digital extender function or lens
extender, is used.
Filter <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator, when
the ND filter is set to other than 1, on/off.
Iris Override <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator, when
the auto iris override is not set to Standard, on/off.
AE Mode
On/Off
Turns AE mode and the AE level setting indicator
on/off.
White Balance Mode
On/Off
Turns the white balance mode indicator on/off.
CC5600K
On/Off
Turns the CC5600K indicator on/off.
Rec Format
On/Off
Turns the recording format indicator on/off.
Gamma
On/Off
Turns the selected gamma type indicator on/off.
Timecode Lock
On/Off
Turns the timecode indicator on/off.
Network Condition
On/Off
Turns the network connection status indicator on/
off.
Proxy Status
On/Off
Turns the proxy status indicator on/off.
NW Client Mode Status On/Off
Turns the network client mode indicator on/off.
Streaming Status
On/Off
Turns streaming transmission on/off.
GPS
On/Off
Turns the GPS reception status indicator on/off.
000
90
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Operation >White Setting
Makes settings related to white balance adjustment.
Operation >Offset White
Makes settings related to white balance offset values.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
White Switch<B>
Memory/ATW
Sets the operating mode selected by the B
position of the WHITE BAL switch.
Memory: Auto white balance
ATW: Auto tracing white balance
Warm Cool <B>
Approximate color temperature
display
(Approx. 1600K to 3200K to
16000K)
Shockless White
Off/1/2/3
Selects the transition time when the WHITE BAL
switch setting is changed (1 is fastest).
When Offset White<B> is set to On, this specifies
the offset (as a color temperature) to add to the
white balance in memory A. (Note that the error
increases for higher offset color temperatures.
Adjust while viewing the actual image.)
Warm Cool
Balance<B>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Specifies a more precise color temperature, for
use when a satisfactory image cannot be
obtained with the Warm Cool <B> setting.
ATW Speed
1/2/3/4/5
Selects the ATW (auto tracing white) transition
speed (1 is fastest).
AWB Fixed Area
On/Off
Runs AWB (auto white balance) for the center of
the screen.
Operation >Shutter
Sets the shutter operating mode.
Filter White Memory
On/Off
Sets the white balance memory area for each
FILTER knob position number when White
Balance is set to Preset or ATW.
ˎˎ When Electrical CC is assigned to an assignable
switch, this sets independent white balance
memory areas for Electrical CC A, B, C, and D
settings.
ˎˎ When Electrical CC is not assigned to an
assignable switch, this sets white balance
memory areas for each FILTER knob position
number.
Item
Setting
Description
Mode
Speed/Angle
Selects the operating mode of the electronic
shutter.
Speed: Sets the shutter speed as a time (units:
seconds).
Angle: Sets the shutter speed as an angle (units:
degrees).
Operation >Offset White
Makes settings related to white balance offset values.
Item
Setting
Description
Offset White<A>
On/Off
Selects whether to add (On) or not to add (Off) an
offset value to the white balance in memory A.
Warm Cool <A>
Approximate color temperature
display
(Approx. 1600K to 3200K to
16000K)
When Offset White<A> is set to On, this specifies
the offset (as a color temperature) to add to the
white balance in memory A. (Note that the error
increases for higher offset color temperatures.
Adjust while viewing the actual image.)
Warm Cool
Balance<A>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Specifies a more precise color temperature, for
use when a satisfactory image cannot be
obtained with the Warm Cool <A> setting.
Offset White <B>
On/Off
When this is set to On, the offset adjusted here is
added to the white balance of channel B.
Operation >Slow Shutter
Sets the slow shutter.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the slow shutter function on/off.
Number of Frames
2/3/4/5/6/7/8/16
Sets the number of accumulated frames for the
slow shutter function.
Item
Setting
Description
Time Zone
UTC +14:00 to UTC Greenwich
to UTC –12:00 Kwajalein
Selects the difference in time from UTC
(Greenwich Mean Time) in units of 30 minutes.
Operation >Time Zone
Sets the time zone.
000
91
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Operation >Clip
Makes settings relating to clip names and management.
Operation >Planning Metadata
Makes settings relating to planning metadata operations.
[Note]
Item
Setting
Description
Load Media (B)
Execute/Cancel
Loads planning metadata from the SxS memory
card in slot B.
Execute to display a list of planning metadata files
stored on the SxS memory card in slot B. Select a
file to display the properties screen.
Properties
Execute/Cancel
Displays the planning metadata content loaded in
the camcorder (execute by selecting Execute).
Clear Memory
Execute/Cancel
Clears the planning metadata loaded in the
camcorder (execute by selecting Execute).
Clip Name Disp
Title1(ASCII)/Title2(UTF-8)
Selects the display format if the clip name is
specified in planning metadata (page 52).
Do not assign clip names that begin with the “.” (period) symbol. Clips with names in which the first character is “.”
cannot be viewed in the application software on a computer.
Item
Setting
Description
Clip Naming
Title/Plan
Selects the clip naming format.
Title: Name specified by Title Prefix.
Plan: Name specified in planning metadata (if no
name is specified in planning metadata, the
name specified by Title Prefix is used.)
Title Prefix
Number Set
Text input
Settings vary according to the
Clip Naming setting.
Sets the title part (4 to 46 alphanumeric
characters) of clip titles using a character string
entry screen (page 80).
Sets the numeric portion of the clip name.
When Clip Naming is set to Title:
0001 to 9999
When Clip Naming is set to Plan and a planning
metadata file is loaded:
00001 to 99999
Operation >Update Media
Updates the media’s management file.
Item
Setting
Description
Media (A)
Execute/Cancel
Updates the management information of the SxS
memory card in slot A (execute by selecting
Execute).
Media (B)
Execute/Cancel
Updates the management information of the SxS
memory card in slot B (execute by selecting
Execute).
Operation >GPS
Turns location information (GPS) on/off.
Item
Setting
Description
GPS
On/Off
Turns the GPS function on/off.
Operation >Planning Metadata
Makes settings relating to planning metadata operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Load Media (A)
Execute/Cancel
Loads planning metadata from the SxS memory
card in slot A.
Execute to display a list of planning metadata files
stored on the SxS memory card in slot A. Select a
file to display the properties screen.
000
92
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Paint Menu
Paint >Black
Sets the black level (image level without lighting).
You can achieve a desired look by adjusting the black level for deeper or shallower blacks.
Default values are shown in bold.
Item
Setting
Description
Master Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master black level.
R Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R black level.
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B black level.
Paint >Switch Status
Turns various correction functions and the test signal on/off.
Item
Setting
Description
B Black
Gamma
On/Off
Turns the gamma function on/off.
Black Gamma
On/Off
Turns the black gamma function on/off.
Matrix
On/Off
Turns the matrix function on/off.
Knee
On/Off
Turns the knee function on/off.
Paint >Flare
Makes settings related to flare correction.
Flare is a phenomenon where the video level increases across the entire image due to the effects of bright
regions in the image, increasing the brightness of darker regions and reducing contrast. It is caused by
reflected light inside the lens.
White Clip
On/Off
Turns the white clip function on/off.
Item
Setting
Description
[Note]
Setting
On/Off
Turns the flare correction function on/off.
Master Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master flare correction level.
R Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R flare correction level.
G Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the G flare correction level.
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B flare correction level.
If set to Off, it is reset to On when power is next turned
on.
Detail
On/Off
Turns the detail function on/off.
Aperture
On/Off
Turns the aperture function on/off.
Flare
On/Off
Turns the flare correction function on/off.
B Flare
Test Saw
On/Off
Turns the test signal on/off.
Paint >White
Sets the color temperature, and adjusts white balance manually.
Paint >Gamma
Makes settings related to gamma correction.
Gamma correction allows you to adjust the contrast of the image to significantly alter the impression of an
image.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Color Temp <A>
1500K to 3200K to 50000K
Displays the white balance color temperature
saved in memory A.
Setting
On/Off
Turns the gamma correction function on/off.
Color Temp Balance
<A>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance gain value saved in
memory A (linked to R gain and B gain).
Step Gamma
0.35 to 0.45 to 0.90
(0.05 steps)
Sets a gamma correction value in 0.05 steps.
R Gain<A>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance R gain value saved in
memory A.
Master Gamma
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master gamma level.
R Gamma
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R gamma level.
B Gain<A>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance B gain value saved in
memory A.
G Gamma
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the G gamma level.
B Gamma
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B gamma level.
Gamma Category
STD/HG/User
Selects the gamma category.
STD: Standard gamma curve for video signals
HG: Gamma curve that imitates gradation and
color reproduction of shooting with film
User: User-defined gamma curve created using
CvpFileEditorTM V4.2
Color Temp <B>
1500K to 3200K to 50000K
Displays the white balance color temperature
saved in memory B.
Color Temp Balance
<B>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance gain values saved in
memory B (linked R gain and B gain).
R Gain <B>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance R gain value saved in
memory B.
B Gain <B>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance B gain value saved in
memory B.
000
93
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Paint >Gamma
Makes settings related to gamma correction.
Gamma correction allows you to adjust the contrast of the image to significantly alter the impression of an
image.
Paint >Black Gamma
Makes settings related to black gamma correction.
Black gamma correction allows you to reproduce gradations and colors in black or near-black (dark) parts
of the picture.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Gamma Select
Settings vary according to the
Gamma Category setting.
Selects the gamma table used for gamma
correction.
Range
Low/L.Mid/H.Mid
Selects the effective range of the black gamma
correction.
Low: 0 to 3.6%
L.Mid: 0 to 7.2%
H.Mid: 0 to 14.4%
Master Black Gamma
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master black gamma level.
When Gamma Category is STD
STD1 DVW: DVW camcorder equivalent
STD2 x4.5: ×4.5 gain
STD3 x3.5: ×3.5 gain
STD4 240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent
STD5 R709: ITU-R709 equivalent (default setting)
STD6 x5.0: ×5.0 gain
When Gamma Category is HG
HG1 3250G36: Compresses 325% video input to
100% video output.
HG2 4600G30: Compresses 460% video input to
100% video output.
HG3 3259G40: Compresses 325% video input to
109% video output.
HG4 4609G33: Compresses 460% video input to
109% video output (default setting).
When Gamma Category is User
User 1: Gamma table registered in User1 (default
setting)
User 2: Gamma table registered in User2
User 3: Gamma table registered in User3
User 4: Gamma table registered in User4
User 5: Gamma table registered in User5
Paint >Black Gamma
Makes settings related to black gamma correction.
Black gamma correction allows you to reproduce gradations and colors in black or near-black (dark) parts
of the picture.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the black gamma correction function on/
off.
[Note]
To enable the black gamma function, set Saturation
Mode to Low Key.
Paint >Knee
Makes settings related to knee correction.
Knee correction is processing that prevents blown out highlights by compressing the bright parts of the
image in response to the upper limit for the dynamic range of the recorded/output image. The signal level
where knee processing begins is called the “knee point,” and the slope of knee compression is called the
“knee slope.”
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the knee correction function on/off.
Point
75% to 95% to 109%
Sets the knee point when the DCC function is off.
Slope
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the knee slope when the DCC function is off.
Knee Saturation
On/Off
Turns the knee saturation function on/off.
[Note]
To enable the knee saturation function, set Saturation
Mode to Knee.
Knee Saturation Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the knee saturation level.
Paint >White Clip
Makes settings related to white clip adjustment.
White clip processing limits the maximum level of video output signals. The maximum video output signal
value is called the “white clip level.”
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the white clip adjustment function on/off.
Level
90.0% to 109.0%
The default setting varies
according to the system
frequency setting.
Sets the white clip level.
The default setting is 108.0% when the system
frequency is 59.94, 29.97, 24, or 23.98. The setting
is 105.0% when the system frequency is 50.25.
000
94
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Paint >Detail(HD)/Detail(SD)
Makes settings related to detail adjustments in HD mode and SD mode.
Detail adjustment processing improves the clarity of images by adding a detail signal to the outline of the
subject.
Paint >Aperture
Makes settings related to aperture correction.
Aperture correction processing improves resolution by adding high-frequency aperture signals to the
video signal, which corrects deterioration due to high-frequency characteristics.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the detail adjustment function on/off.
Setting
On/Off
Turns the aperture correction function on/off.
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the detail level.
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the aperture level.
H/V Ratio
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the mix ratio between the H detail level and
the V detail level.
Crispening
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the crispening level.
Level Depend
On/Off
Turns the level dependence adjustment function
on/off.
Paint >Skin Detail
Makes settings related to skin detail correction.
Skin detail correction processing increases or decreases the detail level of a specified color range, for the
purpose of obtaining attractive reproduction of skin tones.
Item
Setting
Description
Level Depend Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the level dependence level.
Setting
On/Off
Turns the skin detail correction function on/off.
Frequency
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the center frequency of the H detail signal
(larger values give finer detail).
Area Detection
Execute/Cancel
Knee Aperture
On/Off
Turns the knee aperture correction function on/
off.
Displays a color detection screen for detecting
colors for skin detail correction (execute by
selecting Execute).
Area Indication
On/Off
Knee Aperture Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the knee aperture level.
Turns the display of a zebra pattern in areas
targeted for skin detail correction on/off.
Limit
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the detail limiter for both the white-side and
black-side directions.
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the skin detail level.
Saturation
–99 to ±0 to +99
White Limit
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white-side detail limiter.
Sets the saturation of the color targeted for skin
detail correction.
Black Limit
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the black-side detail limiter.
Hue
0 to 359
V Black Limit
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the black-side V detail limiter.
Sets the hue of the color targeted for skin detail
correction.
V Detail Creation
NAM/Y/G/G+R
Selects the source signal used to generate the V
detail signal.
NAM: V detail signal created from the R signal, V
detail signal created from the G signal, or V
detail signal created from the B signal,
whichever signal has the highest level
Y: Y signal
G: G signal
G+R: Mixed signal comprising the G signal and R
signal in a 1:1 ratio
Width
0 to 40 to 90
Sets the range for the hue of the color targeted
for skin detail correction.
Cross Color Suppress
(SD mode)
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the cross color suppression level of the detail.
[Note]
This setting is disabled if the detail adjustment function
is Off, and when Operation Format Frequency in the
setup menu is set to 50 or 25.
Paint >Matrix
Makes settings related to matrix correction.
Adjusts the hue and vividness of the image using matrix correction.
You can select a matrix to achieve a specific purpose using “Adaptive Matrix” to control the effect of a
linear matrix or “Preset Matrix” for a predefined parameter set. You can also set user-defined parameters as
a “User Matrix.”
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the matrix correction function on/off.
Adaptive Matrix
On/Off
Turns the adaptive matrix function on/off.
Preset Matrix
On/Off
Turns the preset matrix function on/off.
000
95
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Paint >Matrix
Makes settings related to matrix correction.
Adjusts the hue and vividness of the image using matrix correction.
You can select a matrix to achieve a specific purpose using “Adaptive Matrix” to control the effect of a
linear matrix or “Preset Matrix” for a predefined parameter set. You can also set user-defined parameters as
a “User Matrix.”
Paint >Multi Matrix
Makes settings related to multi matrix correction.
Multi-matrix correction sets the saturation using a 16-axis hue space.
Item
Setting
Description
Saturation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the saturation of the color targeted for multi
matrix correction for each 16-axis mode.
Item
Setting
Description
Preset Select
1: SMPTE240M
2: ITU-709
3: SMPTE Wide
4: NTSC
5: EBU
6: PAL
Selects a preset matrix.
1: SMPTE240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent
2: ITU-709: ITU-709 equivalent
3: SMPTE Wide: SMPTE WIDE equivalent
4: NTSC: NTSC equivalent
5: EBU: EBU equivalent
6: PAL: PAL equivalent
User Matrix
On/Off
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Phase
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the color tone (phase) of the entire image.
User Matrix R-G
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined R-G user matrix.
User Matrix R-B
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined R-B user matrix.
User Matrix G-R
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined G-R user matrix.
Paint >Low Key Saturation
Makes settings related to low key saturation correction.
Corrects the saturation of colors in dark parts of the image.
User Matrix G-B
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined G-B user matrix.
Item
Setting
Description
User Matrix B-R
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined B-R user matrix.
Setting
On/Off
User Matrix B-G
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined B-G user matrix.
Turns the low key saturation correction function
on/off.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the V modulation shading correction
function on/off.
Turns the user matrix correction function on/off.
Master V Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master V modulation level.
Sets the saturation of the color of the entire
image.
R V Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the V modulation level of the R signal.
G V Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the V modulation level of the G signal.
B V Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the V modulation level of the B signal.
Paint >Multi Matrix
Makes settings related to multi matrix correction.
Multi-matrix correction sets the saturation using a 16-axis hue space.
Item
Paint >V Modulation
Makes settings related to V modulation shading correction.
V modulation shading corrects the vertical slope of the sensitivity arising from the relationship between
the lens and prism.
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the multi matrix correction function on/off.
Area Indication
On/Off
Turns the display of a zebra pattern in the color
area targeted for multi matrix correction on/off.
Color Detection
Execute/Cancel
Displays a color detection screen for detecting
colors for multi matrix correction (execute by
selecting Execute).
Reset
Execute/Cancel
Sets all hue and saturation on each axis to default
values (execute by selecting Execute).
Axis
B/B+/MG–/MG/MG+/R/R+/YL–/
YL/YL+/G–/G/G+/CY/CY+/B–
Sets the color targeted for multi matrix correction
(16-axis mode)
Hue
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the hue of the color targeted for multi matrix
correction for each 16-axis mode.
[Note]
To enable the low key saturation function, set Saturation
Mode to Low Key.
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the saturation of colors in low luminance
areas.
Range
Low/L.Mid/H.Mid
Selects the luminance level for which low key
saturation is enabled.
Paint >Saturation Mode
Makes settings related to saturation correction.
Item
Setting
Description
Saturation Mode
Knee/Low Key
Selects whether the saturation function operates
at high levels (Knee) or low levels (Low Key).
Knee Saturation
On/Off
Turns the knee saturation function on/off.
Black Gamma
On/Off
Turns the black gamma correction function on/
off.
Low Key Saturation
On/Off
Turns the low knee saturation function on/off.
000
96
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Paint >Noise Suppression
Makes settings related to noise suppression (noise compression).
This allows you to effectively suppress noise components while preserving fine edge components of the
subject.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the noise suppression function on/off.
Level
Low/Mid/High
Selects the noise suppression level.
Maintenance Menu
Default values are shown in bold.
Maintenance >White Shading
Makes settings related to white shading correction.
White shading is required for each different lens to correct luminance and color irregularities in bright
areas arising from lens characteristics.
Item
Setting
Description
Channel Select
Red/Green/Blue
Selects the target for white shading correction.
White H Saw
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW white shading correction value for
the horizontal direction.
White H Para
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the parabola white shading correction value
for the horizontal direction.
White V Saw
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW white shading correction value for
the vertical direction.
White V Para
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the parabola white shading correction value
for the vertical direction.
White Saw/Para
On/Off
Turns the white shading SAW/parabola correction
function on/off.
Maintenance >Black Shading
Makes settings related to black shading correction.
Item
Setting
Description
Channel Select
Red/Green/Blue
Selects the target for black shading correction.
Black H Saw
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW black shading correction value for
the horizontal direction.
Black H Para
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the parabola black shading correction value
for the horizontal direction.
Black V Saw
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW black shading correction value for
the vertical direction.
Black V Para
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the parabola black shading correction value
for the vertical direction.
Black Saw/Para
On/Off
Turns the black shading SAW/parabola correction
function on/off.
Master Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master black level.
Master Gain (TMP)
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Sets a temporary master gain value.
000
97
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Maintenance >Battery
Makes settings related to batteries.
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Near End: Info Battery
5%/10%/15%...95%/100%
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
Near End” warning when using a BP-GL65/GL95
battery pack.
Front MIC CH1 Ref
–70dB/–60dB/–50dB/–40dB/
–30dB
Selects the reference level of the front
microphone for channel 1.
Front MIC CH2 Ref
End: Info Battery
0%/1%/2%/3%/4%/5%
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
End” warning when using a BP-GL65/GL95 battery
pack.
–70dB/–60dB/–50dB/–40dB/
–30dB
Selects the reference level of the front
microphone for channel 2.
Rear MIC CH1 Ref
–70dB/–60dB/–50dB/–40dB/
–30dB
Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO
IN CH1 switch is set to MIC.
Rear MIC CH2 Ref
–70dB/–60dB/–50dB/–40dB/
–30dB
Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO
IN CH2 switch is set to MIC.
Line Input Ref
+4dB/0dB/–3dB/EBUL
Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO
IN CH1 and AUDIO IN CH2 switches are set to
LINE.
Min Alarm Volume
Off/Set
Selects the volume when the ALARM knob is
turned all the way down.
Off: Inaudible
Set: Audible
Speaker Attenuate
Off/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB
Selects the volume from the monitor speakers
(does not affect earphone volume).
Headphone Out
Mono/Stereo
Selects whether the earphones are monaural
(Mono) or stereo (Stereo).
Reference Level
–20dB/–18dB/–16dB/–12dB/
EBUL
Sets the output level of the 1 kHz test signal.
Reference Out
+4dB/0dB/–3dB/EBUL
Sets the output level relative to the reference
input level.
CH1&2 AGC Mode
Mono/Stereo
Automatically adjusts the input level of analog
audio signals recorded on channels 1 and 2, and
selects whether to make the adjustments
separately for each channel (Mono) or in stereo
mode (Stereo).
CH3&4 AGC Mode
Mono/Stereo
Automatically adjusts the input level of analog
audio signals recorded on channels 3 and 4, and
selects whether to make the adjustments
separately for each channel (Mono) or in stereo
mode (Stereo).
AGC Spec
–6dB/–9dB/–12dB/–15dB/–17dB Selects the AGC characteristic (saturation level).
Limiter Mode
Off/–6dB/–9dB/–12dB/–15dB/
–17dB
Selects the limiter characteristic (saturation level)
for large input signals when adjusting the audio
input level manually. Select Off if not using the
limiter.
Output Limiter
On/Off
Turns the audio output limiter on/off.
Near End: Sony Battery 11.5V to 17V
(0.1V steps)
End: Sony Battery
11.0V to 11.5V
(0.1V steps)
Near End: Other Battery 11.5V to 11.8V to 17.0V
(0.1V steps)
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
Near End” warning when using a BP-L60S/L80S
battery pack.
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
End” warning when using a BP-L60S/L80S battery
pack.
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
Near End” warning when using a non-Sony
battery pack.
End: Other Battery
11.0V to 14.0V
(0.1V steps)
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
End” warning when using a non-Sony battery
pack.
Detected Battery
Sony Info Battery/Sony Battery/
Other Battery/DC IN
Displays the result of automatic battery pack type
detection.
Maintenance >DC Voltage Alarm
Sets alarms relating to external DC supply voltage.
Item
Setting
Description
DC Low Voltage1
11.5V to 17V
(0.1V steps)
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
Near End” warning when using an external power
source connected to the DC IN connector.
DC Low Voltage2
11.0V to 14.0V
(0.1V steps)
Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
End” warning when using an external power
source connected to the DC IN connector.
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Item
Setting
Description
Front MIC Select
Mono/Stereo
Selects whether the front microphone is
monaural (Mono) or stereo (Stereo).
Rear XLR Auto
On/Off
Turns the automatic detection function on/off for
detecting cable connections on the AUDIO IN
CH-1/CH-2 connectors on the rear panel.
000
98
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
CH1 Wind Filter
On/Off
Turns the channel 1 wind noise reduction filter
on/off.
Audio CH3 Level
Side3/Front/Front+Side3
CH2 Wind Filter
On/Off
Turns the channel 2 wind noise reduction filter
on/off.
CH2 Wind Filter
On/Off
Turns the channel 3 wind noise reduction filter
on/off.
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
recorded on channel 3.
Side3: LEVEL knob on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side3: LEVEL knob and MIC LEVEL knob
(linked control)
CH4 Wind Filter
On/Off
Turns the channel 4 wind noise reduction filter
on/off.
Audio CH4 Level
Side4/Front/Front+Side4
1kHz Tone on Color
Bars
On/Off/Auto
Sets whether to output (On) or not output (Off) a
1 kHz test signal in color bar mode.
Auto: Outputs a test signal only when the AUDIO
SELECT CH1 switch is set to AUTO.
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
recorded on channel 4.
Side4: LEVEL knob on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side4: LEVEL knob and MIC LEVEL knob
(linked control)
MIC CH1 Level
Side1/Front/Front+Side1
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
when recording input audio from the front
microphone on channel 1.
Side1: LEVEL knob (left) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side1: LEVEL knob (left) and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked control)
MIC CH2 Level
Rear1/WRR Level
Rear2/WRR Level
Side2/Front/Front+Side2
Side1/Front/Front+Side1
Side2/Front/Front+Side2
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
when recording input audio from the front
microphone on channel 2.
Side2: LEVEL knob (right) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side2: LEVEL knob (right) and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked control)
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level of a
wireless microphone or a device connected to the
AUDIO IN CH-1 connector on the rear panel.
Side1: LEVEL knob (left) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side1: LEVEL knob (left) and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked control)
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level of a
wireless microphone or a device connected to the
AUDIO IN CH-2 connector on the rear panel.
Side2: LEVEL knob (right) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side2: LEVEL knob (right) and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked control)
Maintenance >WRR Setting
Makes settings related to the wireless tuner.
Item
Setting
Description
WRR Valid CH Sel
All/CH1
Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of the
wireless tuner (All) or channel 1 only (CH1).
WRR CH Select
TX1/TX2
Selects the reception channel for display in the
menu.
TX1: Displays channel 1.
TX2: Displays channel 2.
WRR Delay Comp
On/Off
Selects whether to enable (On) or disable (Off) the
delay compensation function for wireless input
audio. (When On is selected, all E-E output audio
is delayed by about 8 ms.)
TX
---
Displays the name of the transmitter whose
signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH Select.
TX Audio Peak
---/Peak
Displays whether the AF level of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH Select are over peak.
TX Input Level
---/Mic/Line
Displays whether the input level of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH Select is set to microphone
(Mic) or line (Line).
TX ATT Level
---
Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose signals
are being received on the channel selected by
WRR CH Select. (The setting range varies
depending on the transmitter.)
000
99
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Maintenance >WRR Setting
Makes settings related to the wireless tuner.
Maintenance >Essence Mark
Makes settings related to essence marks.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
TX LCF Frequency
---
Sets the low cut filter frequency of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH Select. (The setting range
varies depending on the transmitter.)
Find Mode
Clip/Rec Start
TX System Delay
Auto/0.0ms to 8.0ms
Sets the amount of audio delay.
Auto: Automatically corrects for the amount of
delay so that the delay in the audio from the
wireless tuner is zero.
0.0ms to 8.0ms: Sets the amount of estimated
wireless system delay, for cases in which
several wireless systems are being used via a
device such as an audio mixer.
Sets the operation when the NEXT/PREV button is
pressed.
Rec Start: Moves to the next or the previous
recording start mark, respectively.
Clip: Moves to the start of the next clip when the
NEXT button is pressed. Moves to the start of
the current clip when the PREV button is
pressed (or moves to the start of the previous
clip if the PREV button is pressed at the start
of the clip).
Maintenance >Time Code
Makes settings related to timecode.
Item
Setting
Description
TC Out
Auto/Generator
Selects the timecode output.
Auto: Outputs the timecode generator value
during recording, and the timecode reader
value during playback.
Generator: Outputs the timecode generator value
during recording and playback.
DF/NDF
DF/NDF
Selects drop-frame mode (DF) or non-drop-frame
mode (NDF).
LTC UBIT
Fix/Time
Sets the data recorded in LTC user bits.
Fix: Records user-specified data.
Time: Records the current time.
Counter Display
Counter/Duration
Select the method used to reset the counter value
displayed on the viewfinder screen.
Counter: Continue to increment until the RESET
button is pressed.
Duration: Reset each time that recording is
started.
Maintenance >Camera Config
Makes settings related to various camcorder operations.
Item
Setting
Description
HD SDI Remote I/F
Off/Characters/
Green Tally/Red Tally
Sets whether to enable the recording control
function for an external device connected to the
SDI OUT 1/2 connector (HD SDI output) of the
camcorder. If enabled, it selects the indicator used
to display the recording state of the external
device.
Off: Recording control function is disabled.
Chara: Displayed using the external device control
indicator on the status display in the
viewfinder.
G-Tally: Displayed using the TALLY indicator
(green tally) in the viewfinder.
R-Tally: Displayed using the REC indicator
(recording red tally) in the viewfinder.
Color Bars Select
ARIB/100%/75%/SMPTE
Selects the color bar type.
User Menu Only
On/Off
Selects whether to display the User menu only
(On) or display the menu list (Off) when the
camcorder is displaying the menu.
RM Common Memory
On/Off
Selects whether to share (On) or not share (Off)
settings between when using a remote control
unit connection and when the camcorder is
operated locally.
100
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Maintenance >Camera Config
Makes settings related to various camcorder operations.
Maintenance >Preset White
Makes settings related to white balance preset values.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
RM Rec Start
RM/Camera/PARA
Selects which of the recording start/stop buttons
are enabled when a remote control unit is
connected,
RM: Remote control unit
Camera: Camcorder
PARA: Both
C.Temp BAL <P>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the fine color temperature settings, for use
when a satisfactory image cannot be obtained
using Color Temp<P>.
R Gain <P>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R gain preset value.
BGain <P>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B gain preset value.
AWB Enable <P>
On/Off
Turns execution of the AWB (auto white balance)
function on/off when the WHITE BAL switch is set
to PRST.
SET Key on Thumbnail
Pause/Play
Selects the operation when the MENU knob is
pressed with only one thumbnail selected.
ALAC
Auto/Off
Sets whether to execute ALAC (Auto Lens
Aberration Correction) automatically.
Auto: Execute ALAC automatically when an
ALAC-compatible lens is attached and ALAC
is enabled.
Off: Do not execute.
[Note]
Depending on the aberration correction lens, the
aberration correction function may not be activated
immediately (“ALAC” does not appear on the viewfinder
screen) after turning the power on, even when this
setting is set to Auto. If this occurs, turn the lens zoom
ring and focus ring to the end stop and back, and check
whether the “ALAC” indicator appears on the viewfinder
screen.
Contact a Sony service representative for information about
aberration correction lenses.
Maintenance >Preset White
Makes settings related to white balance preset values.
Maintenance >White Filter
Makes settings related to filters.
Item
Setting
Description
ND Filter C.Temp
On/Off
Turns the function that assigns electrical CC filters
to ND filters on/off.
ND FLT C.Temp<1>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K
Selects the color temperature when electrical CC
filters are assigned to ND filters (filter 1).
ND FLT C.Temp<2-4>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K
Selects the color temperature when electrical CC
filters are assigned to ND filters (filters 2 to 4).
Electrical CC<A>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K
Selects the color temperature when the electrical
CC filter switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Electrical CC<B>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K
Selects the color temperature when the electrical
CC filter switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch.
Electrical CC<C>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K/
---
Selects the color temperature when the electrical
CC filter switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch. Select “----” if not using C.
Electrical CC<D>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K/
---
Selects the color temperature when the electrical
CC filter switching function is assigned to an
assignable switch. Select “----” if not using D.
Item
Setting
Description
Color Temp <P>
1500K to 3200K to 50000K
Sets the white balance preset value.
C.Temp BAL <P>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the fine color temperature settings, for use
when a satisfactory image cannot be obtained
using Color Temp<P>.
R Gain <P>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R gain preset value.
Maintenance >DCC Adjust
Makes settings related to DCC (dynamic contrast control).
B Gain <P>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B gain preset value.
Item
Setting
Description
AWB Enable <P>
On/Off
Turns execution of the AWB (auto white balance)
function on/off when the WHITE BAL switch is set
to PRST.
DCC Function Select
DCC/Fix
Color Temp <P>
1500K to 3200K to 50000K
Sets the white balance preset value.
Selects the setting method for the knee point
when the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to CAM with
DCC on.
DCC: Automatically adjusts the knee point to
match the luminance of the subject.
Fix: Sets the knee point to a fixed value.
101
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Maintenance >DCC Adjust
Makes settings related to DCC (dynamic contrast control).
Maintenance >Auto Shading
Executes auto black shading correction.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
DCC D Range
400%/450%/500%/550%/600%
Sets the dynamic range when the OUTPUT/DCC
switch is set to CAM with DCC on.
Master Gain (TMP)
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
DCC Point
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the DCC minimum knee point.
Sets a temporary master gain value. (The value is
the same as the value selected with the GAIN
switch.)
DCC Gain
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the gain relative to the DCC detected value.
DCC Delay Time
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the DCC control speed (speed of response to
changes in the video).
DCC Peak Filter
–99 to ±0 to +99
Adjusts the response sensitivity relative to the
peaks in DCC detected values.
Maintenance >Flicker Reduce
Makes settings related to the flicker correction function.
You can correct the flicker created when shooting a subject under lighting where the brightness varies
periodically, such as fluorescent lighting, due to the relationship between the frequency and the recording
frame rate.
Item
Setting
Description
Mode
Auto/On/Off
Sets the operation of the flicker correction
function.
On: Always operating.
Auto: Operates when flicker is detected.
Off: Does not operate.
Frequency
60Hz/50Hz
The factory setting is 60Hz when System
Frequency is set to 59.94, 29.97, or 23.98.
The factory setting is 50Hz when System
Frequency is set to 50 or 25.
Maintenance >Genlock
Makes settings related to genlock.
Item
Setting
Description
Genlock
On/Off
Turns the genlock function on/off.
Reference
Internal/External(HD)/
External(SD)/SDI IN/CA
Displays the type of reference signal used by the
camcorder.
Maintenance >Auto Shading
Executes auto black shading correction.
Maintenance >APR
Makes settings related to automatic pixel noise reduction.
Item
Setting
Description
APR
Execute/Cancel
Executes the automatic pixel noise reduction
function to suppress white flecks in SLS mode
(execute by selecting Execute).
Reset
Execute/Cancel
Deletes white flecks data that were added by
execution of the APR and automatic black balance
adjustment functions (execute by selecting
Execute).
Maintenance >Basic Authentication
Makes settings related to basic authentication.
Item
Setting
User Name
(Displays the current user name.) Sets the user name (arbitrary name for basic
authentication). Set to “admin” by factory default.
Description
Password
*******
Sets the password (for basic authentication). Set
to “pxw-x400” by factory default.
Maintenance >Network
Makes settings related to network connections.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the network function on/off.
Wireless Network
Wi-Fi Access Point/Wi-Fi Station/
Modem/Off
Sets the operating mode for wireless LAN
connections.
WPS
Execute/Cancel
Starts Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) (execute by
selecting Execute).
Channel
Auto(5GHz)/Auto/CH1/CH2/
CH3/CH4/CH5/CH6/CH7/CH8/
CH9/CH10/CH11
Sets the wireless LAN channel.
(SSID display)
(Password display)
Displays the SSID and password.
Item
Setting
Description
Auto Black Shading
Execute/Cancel
Executes auto black shading correction (execute
by selecting Execute).
SSID & Password
Reset Black Shading
Execute/Cancel
Clears the black shading correction value (execute
by selecting Execute).
Device Name (Wireless)
[Note]
“Auto(5GHz)” may not be displayed, depending on the
wireless LAN module used.
Displays the name of network device attached to
the USB wireless LAN module connector
102
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Maintenance >Network
Makes settings related to network connections.
Item
Setting
Maintenance >Streaming
Makes settings related to streaming.
Description
Item
Setting
Description
IP Address (Wireless)
Displays the IP address when connected to a
wireless LAN.
Setting
On/Off
Turns streaming transmission on/off.
Subnet Mask (Wireless)
Displays the subnet mask when connected to a
wireless LAN.
MAC Address (Wireless)
Displays the MAC address of the USB Wireless LAN
Module attached to the camcorder.
Regenerate Password
Execute/Cancel
Regenerates a password (execute by selecting
Execute).
Wired LAN
Enable/Disable
Enables/disables wired LAN connection.
Wired LAN Remote
On/Off
If connected to a network using a LAN cable,
operation from a Wi-Fi remote control, web
menu, and “Content Browser Mobile” is enabled.
[Notes]
ˎˎ This setting is set to Off when you turn the power on
again.
ˎˎ When set to On, the monitoring function is not
available.
Preset Select
Preset 1/Preset 2/Preset 3
Selects a streaming preset.
The settings are common to Preset 1/Preset 2/
Preset 3. See below for descriptions for the
settings in a preset.
Size
HD Auto/1280×720/640×360/
480×270
Sets the size of video for streaming.
When “HD Auto” is selected, the size is set to
1920×1080 or 1280×720, according to the setting
of the recording format recorded on the SxS
memory card or the format of the clip to be
played back.
Bit Rate
9Mbps/6Mbps/3Mbps/
2Mbps/1Mbps/0.5Mbps
Sets the bit rate of video for streaming.
The selectable bit rate varies depending on the
Size setting.
Maintenance >Network Client Mode
Makes settings related to network client mode.
[Note]
Network client mode cannot be set if values are not entered for all items.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns network client mode on/off.
Detail Settings
CCM Address
Sets the address of the CCM to connect.
Host name or IP address
CCM Port (1 to 65535 (8443))
Sets the port number of the CCM to connect
User Name
Sets the user name for authentication of the CCM
to connect.
Password
Sets the password of the CCM to connect.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Audio/video data is transmitted as-is via the Internet.
Accordingly, the data may potentially be exposed
to other parties. Always check that the transmission
destination can receive the streaming data.
ˎˎ The data may be sent to an unintended party if the
address or other settings are configured incorrectly.
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played, depending on the
status of the network.
ˎˎ The picture quality may deteriorate in scenes with
excessive motion.
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played when the stream is set
to a large size with a small bit rate. To reduce this,
select a smaller size for the Size setting.
Maintenance >File Transfer
Makes settings related to network transfer of data on SxS memory cards in the camcorder.
Item
Setting
Description
File Transfer
Execute/Cancel
Switches to transfer mode (execute by selecting
Execute).
Auto Upload (Proxy)
Off/On
Turns proxy clip auto transfer on/off.
Type
MPEG-2 TS/UDP/MPEG-2 TS/
RTP
Selects the type of video for streaming.
Destination Address
Character string (0.0.0.0)
Enter the address of the transmission destination
server for streaming data.
Destination Port
1 to 65545 (1234)
Enter the port number of the transmission
destination server used for streaming.
Audio Channel
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
Selects the audio channel for the streaming
output.
103
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
Maintenance >Clock Set
Sets the internal clock.
Maintenance >Version
Displays the version of the camcorder, and updates the camcorder.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Date Mode
YYMMDD/MMDDYY/DDMMYY
Selects the display format for dates.
Number
12H/24H
12H/24H
Selects the clock display format.
Version Up
Execute/Cancel
Displays the software version of the camcorder
(Vx.xx).
Updates the camcorder (execute by selecting
Execute).
Date
Displays the date setting screen.
Time
Displays the time setting screen.
Item
Setting
Select
English/
Espanol/ Русский
[Note]
Cannot be selected when the version updater SD card is
not inserted.
Maintenance >Language
Selects the display language for messages.
Description
/
Selects the display language for messages.
Maintenance >Hours Meter
Makes settings related to the digital hours meter.
Item
Setting
Description
Hours (System)
xxxxH
(xxxx hours)
Displays the cumulative hours of use (cannot be
reset).
Hours (Reset)
xxxxH
(xxxx hours)
Displays the cumulative hours of use (can be
reset).
Reset
Execute/Cancel
Resets the Hours (Reset) display to 0 (execute by
selecting Execute).
Maintenance >Network Reset
Returns network-related settings to their factory default state.
Item
Setting
Description
Reset
Execute/Cancel
Resets network settings (execute by selecting
Execute).
Maintenance >Fan Control
Sets the fan control mode.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
Auto/Minimum/Off in Rec
Selects the fan control mode.
Maintenance >VF Display Setting
Makes settings related to the viewfinder display.
Item
Setting
Description
Chara/Marker
Brightness
5/4/3/2/1
Sets the brightness of character strings, icons, and
markers superimposed in the viewfinder image.
Net-Func Version
Number
Net-Func Ver.Up
Displays the firmware version of the wireless LAN
connection function of the camcorder (Vx.xx)
Execute/Cancel
Updates the firmware of the wireless LAN
connection function (execute by selecting
Execute).
104
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
File >All File
Makes settings related to ALL file operations.
File Menu
Default values are shown in bold.
File >User File
Makes settings relating to user file operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Load SD Card
Displays a screen for loading user file settings
from an SD card.
Save SD Card
Displays a screen for saving user file settings onto
an SD card.
File ID
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID
of user files.
Recall User Preset
Execute/Cancel
Returns the value of menu items registered in the
User menu to the preset values (execute by
selecting [Execute]).
Store User Preset
Execute/Cancel
Stores the value of menu items registered in the
User menu items as the preset values (execute by
selecting [Execute]).
Clear User Preset
Execute/Cancel
Returns the current settings and preset values of
menu items registered in the User menu to the
factory default values (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Load Customize Data
On/Off
Sets whether to load User menu customized
information when [Load SD Card] is executed.
Load White Data
On/Off
Sets whether to load white balance information
when [Load SD Card] is executed.
File >All File
Makes settings related to ALL file operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Load SD Card
Displays a screen for loading All File settings from
an SD card.
Save SD Card
Displays a screen for saving All File settings onto
an SD card.
File ID
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID
of All Files.
All Preset
Execute/Cancel
Returns all items to their preset values (execute by
selecting Execute).
Store All Preset
Execute/Cancel
Stores the current settings of all items as the
preset values (execute by selecting [Execute]).
Item
Setting
Description
Clear All Preset
Execute/Cancel
Returns the current settings and presets of All File
menu items to their factory default values
(execute by selecting Execute).
3Sec Clear Preset
On/Off
Turns the function that clears the currents settings
and presets of each item on/off, when the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch is pushed up and
held for three seconds in the CANCEL/PRST
position.
File >Scene File
Makes settings related to scene file operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Recall Internal Memory
Displays a screen for recalling scene files from
internal memory.
Store Internal Memory
Displays a screen for storing scene files in internal
memory.
Load SD Card
Displays a screen for loading scene files from an
SD card.
Save SD Card
Displays a screen for saving scene files onto an SD
card.
File ID
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID
of scene files.
Scene White Data
On/Off
Sets whether to reflect the while balance data of
scene files when recalling scene files.
File >Reference File
Makes settings related to reference file operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Store Reference
Execute/Cancel
Stores the current settings of reference file target
menu items as the preset values (execute by
selecting [Execute]).
Clear Reference
Execute/Cancel
Returns the current settings and preset values of
reference file target menu items to the factory
default values (execute by selecting [Execute]).
Load Reference(SD
Card)
Execute/Cancel
Loads reference file settings from and SD card and
sets the preset values (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Save Reference(SD
Card)
Execute/Cancel
Stores the preset values of reference file target
menu items to an SD card (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
105
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Menu List
File >Reference File
Makes settings related to reference file operations.
Item
Setting
File ID
File >Lens File
Makes settings related to lens file operations.
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID
of reference files.
B Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B flare level in the lens file.
White Offset R
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance offset R channel correction
value for the lens in the lens file.
White Offset B
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance offset B channel correction
value for the lens in the lens file.
Shading Ch Select
Red/Green/Blue
Selects the target for white shading correction.
Shading H SAW
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW white shading correction value in
the horizontal direction in the lens file.
File >Lens File
Makes settings related to lens file operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Display Mode
Model Name/Lens ID
Selects the items to display in the list box that
appears when saving or loading a file.
Recall Internal Memory
Displays a screen for recalling lens files from
internal memory.
Shading H PARA
–99 to ±0 to +99
Store Internal Memory
Displays a screen for storing lens files in internal
memory.
Sets the parabola white shading correction value
in the horizontal direction in the lens file.
Shading V SAW
–99 to ±0 to +99
Load SD Card
Displays a screen for loading lens files from an SD
card.
Sets the SAW white shading correction value in
the vertical direction in the lens file.
Shading V PARA
–99 to ±0 to +99
Save SD Card
Displays a screen for saving lens files onto an SD
card.
Sets the parabola white shading correction value
in the vertical direction in the lens file.
File ID
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID
of lens files.
File Source
Displays the number of the selected file.
Clear Lens Offset
Execute/Cancel
Clears the lens file (execute by selecting Execute).
Lens Auto Recall
Off/On(Lens Name)/
On(Serial Number)
Sets whether to automatically recall a lens file
when a lens that supports serial communication is
attached.
Lens Serial Number
Displays the serial number of the attached lens
(lenses that support serial communication only).
Lens Name
Displays the model name of the attached lens
(lenses that support serial communication only).
Lens Manufacturer
Displays the name of the manufacturer of the
attached lens (lenses that support serial
communication only).
Master V Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW shading correction value in the
vertical direction in the lens file.
Lens Center H
–40 to ±0 to +40
Sets the horizontal position of the center marker
in the lens file.
Lens Center V
–40 to ±0 to +40
Sets the vertical position of the center marker in
the lens file.
R Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R flare level in the lens file.
G Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the G flare level in the lens file.
File >User Gamma
Makes settings related to user gamma.
Item
Setting
Description
Current Settings
Displays a list screen of the current user gamma
file settings (file names).
Load SD Card
Displays a screen for loading User Gamma
settings from an SD card.
Reset
1/2/3/4/5/All
Resets the settings in the selected user gamma
file (execute by selecting Execute).
Select All to reset all user gamma files.
106
000
7. Menu Display and Settings
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
Using the Assignable Switch item of the Operation menu, you can assign user-specified functions to the
ASSIGN. 0 to 3 switches, the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 switches, the ONLINE button, and the RET button on the
lens.
The following tables lists the functions that are assigned when the camcorder is shipped from the factory.
Switch or button
Function
Assignable Switch setting
ASSIGN. 0 switch
No assignment
Off
ASSIGN. 1 switch
No assignment
Off
ASSIGN. 2 switch
No assignment
Off
ASSIGN. 3 switch
No assignment
Off
ASSIGNABLE 4 switch
No assignment
Off
ASSIGNABLE 5 switch
No assignment
Off
RET button
Rec Review (if playback is allowed)
Lens RET
ONLINE button
Auto transfer proxy clip
Auto Upload(Proxy)
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 0 Switch
Assignable Switch setting
Function
State when camcorder is
next powered on
Off
No assignment
—
Marker
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
Setting retained
ATW Hold
Holds the white balance setting in the ATW
(auto-tracking white balance) mode
—
Picture Cache
Turns picture cache recording mode on/off.
Setting retained
Focus Magnifier
Turns the focus magnification function on/off.
Setting not retained
Zebra
Turns zebra display on/off.
Setting not retained
Shot Mark1
Writes Shot Mark1.
—
Shot Mark2
Writes Shot Mark2.
—
OK Mark
Adds or deletes an OK mark.
—
Clip Flag OK
Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip being
recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag NG
Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip being
recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag Keep
Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip
being recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 Switch
[Note]
Immediately after you assign a function to the ASSIGN. 2 switch or you switch the recording format, the setting of the switch at
that point may not match the camcorder’s internal state. After assigning a function, switch the ASSIGN. 2 switch or power the
camcorder off and on again.
Assignable Switch setting
Function
Off
No assignment
Front Mic
Switches between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected.
Marker
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
Picture Cache 1)
Turns picture cache recording mode on/off.
Zebra
Turns zebra display on/off.
Clip Continuous Rec
Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off.
Digital Extender ×2
Turns the screen magnification (×2) function on/off.
Digital Extender ×3
Turns the screen magnification (×3) function on/off.
Digital Extender ×4
Turns the screen magnification (×4) function on/off.
Rec Source
Switches the signals to be recorded between the camera picture and external
input. (If the camcorder is currently recording or playing, the switch takes effect
after recording or playback ends.)
1) When Picture Cache is assigned, Operation >Rec Function is disabled (grayed out) and cannot be set.
107
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 and 3 Switches, the
ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 Switches, and the ONLINE Button
Assignable Switch setting
Function
State when camcorder is
next powered on
Zoom Wide/Tele
When a lens that supports serial communication
is installed, assigns the Zoom Wide function to
ASSIGNABLE 4, and assigns the Zoom Tele
function to ASSIGNABLE 5 (displayed only when
<4> and <5> are set).
—
Focus Magnifier
Turns the focus magnification function on/off.
Setting not retained
Zebra
Turns zebra display on/off.
Setting not retained
Lens RET
Displays return video signal.
When a camera extension unit is not connected:
Rec Review (if playback is allowed)
—
Assignable Switch setting
Function
State when camcorder is
next powered on
Off
No assignment
—
Front Mic
Switches between stereo (On) and monaural (Off) Setting retained
when a stereo microphone is connected.
Marker
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
ATW
Turns ATW (auto tracing white balance) mode on/ Setting not retained
off.
Return Video
Displays the return 1 video signal.
—
ATW Hold
Hold the white balance setting in the ATW mode.
—
Return Video2
Displays the return 2 video signal.
—
Turbo Gain
Executes Turbo Gain according to the setting of
Operation >Gain Switch >Gain Turbo.
Setting not retained
Return Video3
Displays the return 3 video signal.
—
Return Video4
Displays the return 4 video signal.
—
Rec Review
Executes recording review.
—
Shot Mark1
Writes Shot Mark1.
—
Rec
Starts or stops recording.
—
Shot Mark2
Writes Shot Mark2.
—
Network Client Mode
Turns network client mode on/off.
Setting retained
OK Mark
Adds or deletes an OK mark.
—
Streaming
Turns streaming transmission on/off.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag OK
Setting not retained
Auto Upload(Proxy)
Turns proxy clip auto transfer on/off.
Setting retained
Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip being
recorded or played.
Picture Cache
Turns picture cache recording mode on/off.
Setting retained
Clip Flag NG
Turns the spotlight function in auto iris mode on/
off.
Setting retained
Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip being
recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Spotlight
Clip Flag Keep
Turns the backlight function in auto iris mode on/ Setting retained
off.
Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip
being recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Backlight
Color Temp SW 3200K
Adjusts white balance using 3200K preset value.
Setting retained
VF Mode
Switches the viewfinder screen between B&W
(On) and color (Off).
Setting retained
Color Temp SW 4300K
Adjusts white balance using 4300K preset value.
Setting retained
Color Temp SW 5600K
Adjusts white balance using 5600K preset value.
Setting retained
Switches the video signal monitor display
function.
Setting retained
Color Temp SW 6300K
Adjusts white balance using 6300K preset value.
Setting retained
Electrical CC
Setting retained
Lens Info
Switches the depth of field indication between
off, displayed in meters, and displayed in feet.
Setting retained
Zoom Tele/Wide
When a lens that supports serial communication
is installed, assigns the Zoom Tele function to
ASSIGNABLE 4, and assigns the Zoom Wide
function to ASSIGNABLE 5 (displayed only when
<4> and <5> are set).
—
Function that switches the electrical CC filter
(3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) applied to white
balance adjustment values.
Sequence with each press of the switch/button:
3200K  4300K  5600K  6300K
Can be changed using menu settings (Electrical
CC <A> <B> <C> <D>).
Video Signal Monitor
Setting retained
[Note]
This function is not available when Maintenance >White
Filter >ND Filter C.Temp in the setup menu is set to On.
If you set ND Filter C.Temp to On after assigning the
function, the assignable switch ceases to function.
108
000
7. Menu Display and Settings: Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
Assignable Switch setting
Function
State when camcorder is
next powered on
CC5600K
Applies a 5600K electrical CC filter to white
balance adjustment values.
Setting retained
Clip Continuous Rec
Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off.
Setting not retained
Slot Select
When recording media is loaded in both card
slots A and B, selects the card you want to use.
—
Digital Extender ×2
Turns the screen magnification (×2) function on/
off.
Setting not retained
Digital Extender ×3
Turns the screen magnification (×3) function on/
off.
Setting not retained
Turns the screen magnification (×4) function on/
off.
Setting not retained
Digital Extender ×4
Digital Extender
×2×3×4
Setting not retained
Switches the magnification of the screen
magnification function.
Each press of the switch or button switches in the
order Off  ×2  ×3  ×4  Off.
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the RET Button on the Lens
Assignable Switch setting
Function
State when camcorder is
next powered on
Off
No assignment
—
Lens RET
Displays return video signal.
When a camera extension unit is not connected:
Rec Review (if playback is allowed)
—
Return Video
Displays return video signal.
—
Rec Review
Executes recording review.
—
Shot Mark1
Writes Shot Mark1.
—
Shot Mark2
Writes Shot Mark2.
—
Clip Flag OK
Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip being
recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag NG
Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip being
recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag Keep
Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip
being recorded or played.
Setting not retained
OK Mark
Adds or deletes an OK mark.
—
Focus Magnifier
Turns the focus magnification function on/off.
Setting not retained
Digital Extender ×2
Turns the screen magnification (×2) function on/
off.
Setting not retained
Digital Extender ×3
Turns the screen magnification (×3) function on/
off.
Setting not retained
Digital Extender ×4
Turns the screen magnification (×4) function on/
off.
Setting not retained
Digital Extender
×2×3×4
Setting not retained
Switches the magnification of the screen
magnification function.
Each press of the switch or button switches in the
order Off  ×2  ×3  ×4  Off.
109
000
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
User Configuration Data
You can save setup menu settings in the
camcorder’s internal memory and on SD cards.
This allows you to quickly recall an appropriate set
of menu settings for the current situation.
To save setup data on an SD card, insert a writable
SD card (page 30) into the UTILITY SD card slot
before proceeding.
Inserting an SD card (for saving configuration
data)
User Files
Reference Files
User files save the setting items and data of the
customizable User menu. You can save up to 64
files on an SD card. By loading this file into the
camcorder memory, you can customize the setup
of the User menu.
Reference files save the scene file standard settings
(when File ID is Standard). You can save one file in
the camcorder’s internal memory and one file on
an SD card.
1 Open the switch cover.
2 Insert the SD card (for saving configuration
ALL Files
3 Close the switch cover.
[Note]
data) in the UTILITY SD card slot.
ALL files save the configuration data of all menus.
You can save up to 64 files on an SD card.
Device specific data (shading, output levels, and other data
that requires adjustment for the specific device) is not saved.
Ejecting an SD card (for saving configuration data)
1 Open the switch cover.
2 Press the SD card in slightly, then remove the
card.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If the camcorder is turned off or the SD card is removed
while the SD is being accessed, the integrity of data on
the card cannot be guaranteed. All data recorded on the
card may be discarded. Always make sure the ACCESS
indicator is off before turning off the camcorder or
removing the SD card.
ˎˎ Take caution to prevent the SD card from flying out when
inserting/ejecting the card.
The following user data is supported.
Scene Files
Scene files save adjustments to Paint menu items
for the purpose of shooting a particular scene. You
can save up to five files in the camcorder’s internal
memory and up to 64 files on an SD card.
Scene files allow you to save the following types
of data.
ˎˎValues set in the Paint menu
ˎˎShutter speeds set in standard mode or ECS
mode
ˎˎWhite balance data
The data that is saved and loaded depends on
the setting of File >Scene File >Scene White
Data in the setup menu.
Scene files can be stored in internal memory on
the camcorder or on an SD card.
Scene files can also be loaded into the camcorder.
Lens Files
You can set the following data for correcting for
the lens characteristics, and save the data as a
lens file. You can save up to 32 lens files in the
camcorder’s internal memory and up to 64 lens
files on an SD card.
Configuration data
Sub-items
V modulation shading
correction values
M V Modulation
Center marker position
Lens Center H
Lens Center V
Flare level
R Flare
G Flare
B Flare
White balance correction
value
White Offset R
White Offset B
White shading correction
value
Shading Ch Select
Shading H SAW
Shading H PARA
Shading V SAW
Shading V PARA
Gamma Files
You can save up to five user-defined gamma
table data files (User Gamma Data File) in internal
memory.
000
110
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
User Files
Saving a User File
Loading a User File
1 Select File > User File >Save SD Card in the
1 Select File >User File >Load SD Card in the
setup menu.
A screen for selecting a user file save
destination appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination,
then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No
File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID
name will overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you
can modify it.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >User File >File ID in the setup
menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then
press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
setup menu.
A user file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
[Note]
The camcorder will reboot automatically after loading
configuration data.
000
111
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
ALL Files
Saving Configuration Data as an ALL
File
1 Select File >All File >Save SD Card in the setup
menu.
A screen for selecting an ALL file save
destination appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination,
then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No
File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID
name will overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you
can modify it.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
If an error message appears
One of the following error messages may appear
during execution of the save, or as soon as you
select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not saved.
Error
message
Problem
Solution
File Access
NG
No recordable
Insert recordable
media is inserted. media.
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >All File >File ID in the setup menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then
press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
Loading Configuration Data
1 Select File >All File >Load SD Card in the setup
menu.
An ALL file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
Restoring All Current Settings to
Preset Values
Resetting Current Settings and Preset
Values to Factory Default Settings
In this document, initial setup menu settings
configured/saved by the user are referred to as
“preset values.”
Even after loading files to set up the camcorder,
and overwriting original files with new settings,
you can reset the contents of the files by
recovering the preset values.
1 Select File >All File >Clear All Preset in the
1 Select File >All File >All Preset in the setup
menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
press the knob.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When you load a file from an SD card, the data saved in
the camcorder’s internal memory is overwritten.
ˎˎ When loading files from one device to another, if the
firmware versions on the two devices do not match, the
setting values for functions that are not supported on the
destination device are not loaded.
ˎˎ The camcorder will reboot automatically after loading
configuration data.
If an error message appears
One of the following error messages may appear
during execution of the load, or as soon as you
select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not loaded.
Error
message
Problem
Solution
File Access
NG
Insert the media
There is no
that contains the
readable media
The specified file file you want.
does not exist on
the media
Saving All Current Settings as Preset
Values
1 Select File >All File >Store All Preset in the
setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
[Note]
The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing.
setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
[Note]
The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing.
000
112
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Scene Files
Saving a Scene File in Internal
Memory
1 Select File >Scene File >Store Internal Memory
in the setup menu.
A scene file list screen appears.
If the File ID is set to “Standard” destination,
preconfigured standard settings are saved.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination,
then press the knob.
The scene file is saved, overwriting any existing
file, in the selected destination.
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >Scene File >File ID in the setup
menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then
press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the Loading a Scene File from Internal
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
Memory
1 Select File >Scene File >Recall Internal Memory
Saving a Scene File on an SD Card
in the setup menu.
A scene file list screen appears.
1 Select File >Scene File >Save SD Card in the
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination,
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
setup menu.
A scene file save destination screen appears.
then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No
File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID
name will overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you
can modify it.
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
press the knob.
Load a Scene File from an SD Card
File >Scene File >Load SD Card in the
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the 1 Select
setup menu.
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
A scene file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
000
113
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Reference Files
Saving Current Settings as Preset
Values
Loading a Reference File from an SD
Card
1 Select File >Reference File >Store Reference in 1 Select File >Reference File >Load Reference(SD
the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
Card) in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
Saving Current Settings as Preset
Values on an SD Card
Resetting Current Settings and Preset
Values to Factory Default Settings
press the knob.
press the knob.
1 Select File >Reference File >Save Reference(SD 1 Select File >Reference File >Clear Reference in
Card) in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >Reference File >File ID in the setup
menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then
press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
000
114
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Lens Files
Saving a Lens File in Internal Memory
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >Lens File >Store Internal Memory
1 Select File >Lens File >File ID in the setup
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination,
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then
in the setup menu.
A lens file list screen appears.
then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with File ID of “No
offset.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID
name will overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you
can modify it.
Saving a Lens File on an SD Card
press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
Memory
1 Select File >Lens File >Recall Internal Memory
in the setup menu.
A lens file list screen appears.
1 Select File >Lens File >Save SD Card in the
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination,
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
setup menu.
A lens file save destination screen appears.
then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No
File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID
name will overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you
can modify it.
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
press the knob.
Loading a Lens File from an SD Card
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the 1 Select File >Lens File >Load SD Card in the
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the Loading a Lens File from Internal
confirmation message screen, then press the
knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
setup menu.
A lens file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
then press the knob.
Loading a Lens File Automatically
When you are using a lens that supports serial
communication, you can set up the camcorder
by automatically loading the lens file that
corresponds to the lens settings (Lens Auto Recall
function).
To use the Lens Auto Recall function, set File >Lens
File Lens >Auto Recall in the setup menu to one of
the following.
Off: Do not use the Lens Auto Recall function.
On (Lens Name): Load the lens file that
corresponds to the lens model name.
On (Serial Number): Load the lens file that
corresponds to the lens model name and
serial number (when the lens supports
communication of the serial number).
If the lens does not support communication of
the serial number, even when set to On (Serial
Number), load the lens file that corresponds to the
lens model name.
000
115
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Gamma Files
Checking the Current Gamma File
Settings (File Names)
Using User Gamma Files Created
Using CvpFileEditorTM V4.3
Select File >User Gamma >Current Settings in
the setup menu to display a list of the currently
configured user gamma files.
Save created user gamma files to be loaded in the
“PRIVATE/SONY/PRO/CAMERA/HD_CAM” directory
of the SD card.
Loading a User Gamma File from an
SD Card
Resetting a User Gamma File to Initial
State
1 Select File >User Gamma >Load SD Card in the 1 Select File >User Gamma >Reset in the setup
setup menu.
A user gamma file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
menu.
A gamma file number reset screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the number of
the gamma file to reset (1 to 5).
To reset all gamma files, select [All].
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
116
000
9. Connecting External Devices
Connecting a Remote Control Unit
When an RM-B170 Remote Control Unit,
RCP1001/1501 Remote Control Panel, or other
control unit is connected, some camcorder
functions can be controlled from that unit.
You can use the display on the RM-B170 or a video
monitor connected to the MONITOR connector
of the remote control unit to perform camcorder
menu operations and monitor the camcorder
picture.
Releasing Remote Control Mode
Turn off the camcorder and disconnect the remote
control unit.
The switch settings on the camcorder become
enabled.
Connecting a Monitor to an RM-B170
Connecting a Remote Control Unit
Using the remote control cable, connect between
the REMOTE connector (8-pin) of the camcorder
and the camera connector of the remote control
unit.
When you turn on the camcorder after making the
connection, the camcorder enters remote control
mode, enabling menu operations and shooting
operations.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Remote control operation is not supported if USB
connection to the camcorder is enabled.
ˎˎ If a USB connection to the camcorder is enabled during
remote control, remote control mode is released.
ˎˎ Do not connect or disconnect the remote control unit
when the camcorder is on.
ˎˎ A remote control cable is not supplied with the RCP1001/1501 Remote Control Unit.
The following switches of the camcorder are
disabled when a remote control unit is connected.
ˎˎGAIN switch
ˎˎWHITE BAL switch
ˎˎAUTO W/B BAL switch
ˎˎSHUTTER switch
ˎˎOUTPUT/DCC switch
ˎˎASSIGN. 1/3 switches, ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches,
and the ONLINE button to which the Turbo Gain
or ATW function has been assigned
The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the RMB170 outputs the same signal as the output from
the VIDEO OUT connector.
To connect a monitor to the MONITOR connector
on the RM-B170, use the black cable supplied with
the RM-B170.
Image Quality Adjustment when an
RM-B170 is Connected
When the RM-B170 is connected, the parameters
for camera image quality adjustment items (paint
data) are set to the parameters that were specified
the last time that the RM-B170 was connected.
Function of Recording Start/Stop
Buttons when an RM-B170 is
Connected
Set the function of the buttons using Maintenance
>Camera Config >RM Rec Start in the setup menu.
The functions of the buttons for the RM Rec Start
settings are given below.
Button
RM Rec Start setting
RM
Camera
PARA
Camcorder REC
START button
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Lens VTR button
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
ASSIGN. 1/3
switches,
ASSIGNABLE 4/5
switches, and
ONLINE button
assigned with
recording start/
stop function
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
RM-B170 VTR
button
Enabled
Camcorder setup menu
Main data block
RM-B170
Remote control data
block
Camcorder non-volatile memory
Disabled
Enabled
Camera unit hardware
RM-B170 connected
RM-B170 not connected
Data Structure of Image Quality
Adjustment Data
The non-volatile memory of the camcorder used
for storing camera image quality adjustment data
(paint data) consists of the two regions shown
below: a “main data block” that is used when
a remote control unit is not connected, and a
“remote control data block” that is used when a
remote control unit is connected. Paint adjustment
data is automatically selected and output to the
camera section depending on whether or not
a remote control unit, such as the RM-B170, is
connected.
When a remote control unit is connected, the
“remote control data block” is selected as the
current paint data block, and the paint adjustment
parameters that were in effect the last time the
remote control unit was used are loaded.
However, when the settings of absolute value
controls 1) and absolute value switches 2) are set
on the remote control unit, the settings on the
remote control unit override the settings on the
camcorder.
When the remote control unit is disconnected
from the camcorder, the “main data block” is reenabled, and the camcorder returns to the settings
that were in effect before the remote control unit
was connected.
1) Absolute value controls: Data corresponding to the
angular position of the control is output. Controls for
which data corresponding to the amount of rotation is
output are called relative value controls.
2) Absolute value switches: Switches (or knobs), such
as toggle switches or slide switches (except most
momentary switches) whose positions must coincide with
their functions are called absolute value switches.
When Maintenance >Camera Config >RM
Common Memory in the setup menu is set to
[On], you can use settings of the paint adjustment
000
117
9. Connecting External Devices: Connecting a Remote Control Unit
data stored in the main data block even if a
remote control unit is connected. In this case,
the settings stored in the main data block will
be updated when you change the settings on
the remote control unit. Thus, the settings of the
paint data made with the remote control unit will
be retained even after the remote control unit is
removed. However, if the switch position on the
remote control unit differs from the one on the
camcorder, the switch position on the camcorder
takes precedence.
Also, it is possible to keep the settings that are in
effect before you connect the remote control unit.
In this case, you must set the control knobs to
relative value mode on the remote control unit.
For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with the
remote control unit.
Operating the Menu from the
RM-B170
1 Set the DISPLAY switch to the MENU position.
The menu is displayed on the monitor
connected to the MONITOR connector of the
RM-B170.
2 Select and set menu items using the MENU
SELECT knob and CANCEL/ENTER switch.
3 When finished, set the DISPLAY switch to the
ON or OFF position to exit the menu.
For details about RMB170 operation, refer to the operation
manual of the RM-B170.
000
118
9. Connecting External Devices
Connecting an External Monitor
Select the output signal and use an appropriate cable for the monitor to be connected.
of that external device to match the analog
composite signal setting for the VIDEO OUT
connector.
To input camcorder output audio to an external
device such as a monitor, VTR, or other recording
device, connect the audio output of the AUDIO
OUT connector to the audio input of that external
device.
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).
BNC cable (not supplied)
HDMI OUT Connector (Type A
Connector)
BNC cable (not supplied)
Regardless of whether the signal is HD or SD,
the same status information and menus can be
displayed on the external monitor as those on the
viewfinder screen.
>SDI Out1 Output/SDI Out2 Output in the setup
menu (page 85).
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).
[Note]
The SD signal down-converted output is enabled when
Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup
menu is set to 720×486i or 720×576i.
SDI OUT Connector (BNC)
The SDI OUT connector can be used to connect a
device that supports SDI. The device type can be a
monitor, switcher, VTR, or other recording device.
The output signal from this connector can be
turned on and off using Operation >Input/Output
VIDEO OUT Connector
The VIDEO OUT connector can be used to connect
a device that supports analog composite signals.
The device type can be a monitor, VTR, or other
recording device.
The output signal changes in conjunction with
the setting of Operation >Input/Output >Output
Format in the setup menu.
To input the VIDEO OUT connector output signal
to an external analog composite device, it may
be necessary to change the input signal setting
You can turn the output signal from the
camcorder on/off using Operation >Input/Output
>HDMI Output in the setup menu.
The output signal format is set using Operation
>Input/Output >Output Format in the setup
menu.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable for
connection.
000
119
9. Connecting External Devices
Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer
The clips recorded on SxS memory cards with this
camcorder can be controlled on a computer or
edited using optional nonlinear editing software.
USB Connection with a Computer
When you connect the camcorder to a computer
using a USB cable (not supplied), the memory card
in the slot is recognized as an extended drive by
the computer.
When two memory cards are mounted in
the camcorder, they are recognized as two
independent extended drives by the computer.
prompt you to confirm that you wish to enable the
USB connection.
If you select “Cancel” or push the MENU CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE position,
or if you disconnect the USB cable, the message
“Connect USB Now?” disappears.
If you select “Execute” and press the MENU knob,
the USB connection is enabled and the camcorder
is recognized as an extension drive.
If the USB connection is enabled during recording/
playback operation, the operation is stopped and
the message “USB Connecting” appears on the
viewfinder screen.
At this time, the output signal from the VIDEO OUT
connector and SDI OUT 1/2 connectors changes to
a black signal.
[Notes]
USB cable
(not supplied)
ˎˎ The camcorder cannot be operated for recording,
playback, and so on while the message “USB Connecting”
is displayed.
ˎˎ When the computer accesses the media loaded in
the camcorder, do not try to carry out the following
operations.
–– Operating the camcorder (turning the power on/off,
switching the operating mode, etc.)
–– Removing or loading a media from an active slot
(being accessed from the computer)
–– Removing or connecting the USB cable
Releasing the USB connection
[Notes]
ˎˎ Turn the camcorder on and wait until the image and
information are displayed on the screen, then connect the
USB cable to the camcorder.
ˎˎ When connecting the USB cable to the computer, be
careful to check the form and direction of the USB
connector.
ˎˎ The camcorder does not work on the bus power from the
computer.
To start USB connection
When you connect a computer to the PC
connector with a USB cable (not supplied), the
message “Connect USB Now?” is displayed to
To release the USB connection, follow the same
procedure as that for removing a device from the
computer.
To enable the USB connection again, first
disconnect the USB cable and then reconnect it.
The message “Connect USB Now?” appears again.
To remove an SxS memory card
On Windows
1 Click on the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon on
the task bar of the computer.
2 Select “Safely remove SxS Memory Card Drive(X:)” from the displayed menu.
3 Check that the “Safe To Remove Hardware”
message appears, then remove the card.
On Macintosh
Drag the SxS memory card icon on the desktop to
the Trash.
If the SxS memory card icon is displayed in the
Finder, click on the eject icon.
To use the application software
To copy clips to the local disk of your computer,
the dedicated application software must be
downloaded and installed on your computer. For
details about downloading software, see “Software
Downloads” (page 132).
Although the data regarding recorded materials
are stored over multiple files and folders, you
can easily handle the clips without considering
such data and directory structure by using the
dedicated application software.
[Note]
If you perform operations on clips, such as copying the clips
on the SxS memory card using Explorer (Windows) or Finder
(Macintosh), the subsidiary data contained by the clips may
not be maintained.
To use a nonlinear editing system
In a nonlinear editing system, editing software
(option) that supports the formats recorded by the
camcorder is required.
Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of
your computer in advance, using the supplied
application software.
Some editing software may not operate properly.
Be sure to confirm before use that it conforms to
the recording formats used with this camcorder.
000
120
9. Connecting External Devices
Configuring a Shooting and Recording System
You can mount a CA-FB70/TX70 HD Camera Adaptor to the camcorder and connect a Camera Control
Unit (CCU).
This allows you to configure a shooting and recording system consisting of multiple camcorders with
camera extension units connected to a remote control unit.
For more information about the CA-FB70 and CA-TX70, refer to their respective operation manuals.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When using the camcorder in this system, do not connect a video light to the camcorder.
ˎˎ Supported only for XAVC and MPEG HD recording.
ˎˎ Not supported for proxy recording and wireless LAN connection function.
Tally and Call Indicators
The tally and call indicators for a system are as follows.
Data received from system
Tally
Green
Tally
CA call
HDVF LED indicators
Non-CA
call
REC/
TALLY
LED
GREEN
TALLY
LED
Text display on viewfinder screen


CALL
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Not lit
Not lit
No display No display No display
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Lit
Not lit

No display CALL
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Not lit
Not lit
No display No display CALL
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Lit
Not lit

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Not lit
Lit
No display 
No display
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Lit
Lit

CALL
No display CALL

OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Not lit
Lit
No display 
CALL
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Lit
Lit


CALL
No display No display
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Lit
Not lit

ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Not lit
Not lit
No display No display CALL
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Lit
Not lit

ON
OFF
ON
ON
Not lit
Not lit
No display No display CALL
No display CALL
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Lit
Lit

ON
ON
OFF
ON
Not lit
Lit
No display 

No display
CALL
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Lit
Lit


CALL
ON
ON
ON
ON
Not lit
Lit
No display 
CALL
[Note]
Alarm indications using the tally indicator in the warning display are not displayed while a CA-FB70/TX70 Camera Adaptor is
connected.
000
121
9. Connecting External Devices: Configuring a Shooting and Recording System
Supported Formats and Limitations of Shooting/Recording Systems
Operation menu
The supported formats and operation limitations of a shooting/recording system comprising the
camcorder, camera adaptor, and camera control unit are shown in the following table.
Frequency
Operation menu
Format
Input/Output
Frequency
Rec Format
59.94
XAVC-L 50 1080P
System format of
camera adaptor /
camera control unit
Output Format
Camcorder
limitation
Format
50
No
1920×1080i
1920×1080 59.94i
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080 50i
Yes
1280×720P
1280×720 50P
Yes
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080 25PsF a)
1920×1080 50i
Yes
1280×720P
1280×720 50P
No
HD422 50 1080i
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
XAVC-I 720P
XAVC-L 50 720P
HD422 50 1080i
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
HQ 1440×1080i
1280×720P
1280×720 59.94P
Yes
25
XAVC-I 1080P
XAVC-L 50 1080P
XAVC-L 50 720P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 720P
HD422 50 1080P
HQ 1280×720P
1920×1080PsF
XAVC-L 50 1080P
1920×1080 29.97PsF a)
1920×1080 59.94i
HQ 1920×1080P
Yes
HD422 50 720P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
a) A PsF setting is recommended when a CA-TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected.
HD422 50 1080P
[Note]
In a shooting/recording system, special recording functions, such as wireless LAN connection function or Slow & Quick Motion,
cannot be used simultaneously.
HQ 1920×1080P
23.98
No
XAVC-L 25 1080i
XAVC-L 25 1080i
XAVC-I 1080P
1920×1080 50i
XAVC-L 35 1080i
XAVC-L 35 1080i
29.97
1920×1080i
XAVC-L 50 1080i
XAVC-L 50 1080i
XAVC-I 720P
XAVC-L 50 1080P
XAVC-I 1080i
XAVC-L 35 1080P
XAVC-I 1080i
HD422 50 720P
1280×720P
1280×720 59.94P
No
XAVC-I 1080P
1920×1080i
(2-3PD)
1920×1080 59.94i
No
1280×720P
(2-3PD)
1280×720 59.94P
No
XAVC-L 50 1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P
HQ 1920×1080P
HD422 50 720P
Return video
display
XAVC-L 35 1080P
SDI
1920×1080 59.94i
Output Format
Camcorder
limitation
SDI
Return video
display
1920×1080i
Input/Output
Rec Format
System format of
camera adaptor /
camera control unit
000
122
9. Connecting External Devices
Recording External Input Signals
You can record SDI signals from devices connected to the SDI IN connector of the camcorder.
To output and record input signals instead of the camera picture, set Operation >Input/Output >Source
Select in the setup menu to [External].
HD/SD
Operation >Format >Rec
Format in the setup menu
Operation >Format
Supported external input signal
>Frequency in the setup menu formats
HD
XAVC-L 50 720P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
SD 486 59.94i
50
SD 576 50i
59.94
SD 486 59.94i
50
SD 576 50i
[Notes]
ˎˎ External input signals cannot be recorded in Slow & Quick Motion mode. When a special recording mode, such as Slow &
Quick Motion mode, is selected, the recording mode is canceled when you set Operation >Input/Output >Source Select in
the setup menu to [External].
ˎˎ Execution of automatic adjustment functions, such as automatic black balance, and operations, such as playback, Rec
Review, and thumbnail display, will end when Operation >Input/Output >Source Select in the setup menu is set to
[External]. The camcorder enters stop mode and then the camera picture switches to external input.
ˎˎ Recording may stop if the input signal is disturbed while recording external input. Recording automatically resumes when
the input signal returns to normal.
ˎˎ Not supported for proxy recording and wireless LAN connection function.
HD422 50 1080i
HD422 50 720P
Supported External Input Signal Formats and Camcorder Recording Formats
HD/SD
HD
Operation >Format >Rec
Format in the setup menu
Operation >Format
Supported external input signal
>Frequency in the setup menu formats
XAVC-I 1080i
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
XAVC-I 720P
XAVC-L 50 1080i
59.94
50
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
SD
MPEG IMX 50
DVCAM
123
000
10. Maintenance and Inspection
Maintenance
Cleaning the Viewfinder
Note about the Battery Terminals
Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and
mirror inside the viewfinder barrel.
Clean the lens and protecting filter with a
commercially available lens cleaner.
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for
battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable
part.
Power may not be supplied to the unit properly
if the pins of the battery terminal are bent or
deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they become
corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep
the unit working properly and to prolong its
usable lifetime.
Contact a Sony service or sales representative for
more information about inspections.
[Note]
Never use organic solvents such as thinners.
Exchanging the Battery of the
Internal Clock
The camcorder’s internal clock is powered by a
lithium battery. If the message “BackUp Battery
End” appears in the viewfinder, this battery
must be exchanged. Contact a Sony service
representative.
000
124
10. Maintenance and Inspection
Error/Warning System
If a warning, caution, or operating condition that requires confirmation occurs on the camcorder, a message is displayed in the viewfinder, the corresponding indicators start flashing, and a warning sound is emitted.
You can adjust the volume of the warning sound using the ALARM knob. If the ALARM knob is set to minimum, the warning sound will not be audible.
Error Display
The camcorder will stop operation when the following kind of display occurs.
Error message
Warning sound WARNING
indicator
Tally/REC indicator
Cause and Solution
E + error code
Continuous
High-speed flashing
Indicates an abnormality in the camcorder.
Turn off the camcorder, and check for any problem with connected devices, cables, or media.
(If the camcorder does not turn off when the POWER switch is set to OFF, remove the battery or disconnect the AC supply.)
If the error persists when the camcorder is turned on again, contact your Sony service representative.
—
Warning Display
Follow the instructions provided if the following display occurs.
Warning message
Warning sound WARNING
indicator
Tally/REC indicator
Cause and Solution
Media Near Full
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The remaining capacity on the SxS memory card is getting low.
Replace at the earliest convenience.
Media Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
Clips could not be recorded, copied, or split because there is no remaining capacity on the SxS memory card.
Replace immediately.
Battery Near End
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The remaining capacity of the battery pack is getting low.
Recharge at the earliest convenience.
(The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.)
Battery End
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
The battery pack is dead.
Recording is disabled.
Connect a power source to DC IN and allow the battery pack to recharge without attempting to operate the camcorder.
(The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.)
Temperature High
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The internal temperature is high.
Turn off the camcorder and allow it to cool down before operating it again.
Voltage Low
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The DC IN voltage is low (level 1).
Check the power source.
Insufficient Voltage
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
The DC IN voltage is too low (level 2).
Recording is disabled.
Connect a different power source.
(The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.)
000
125
10. Maintenance and Inspection: Error/Warning System
Warning message
Warning sound WARNING
indicator
Tally/REC indicator
Cause and Solution
Clips Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on an SxS memory card has been reached. Recording or copying more
clips is not possible. Replace immediately.
Last Clip Recording
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The clip currently recording is the last clip that can be recorded, as the maximum number of clips has been reached.
Prepare a new SxS memory card.
Clips Near Full
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The number of additional clips that can be recorded on the SxS memory card is getting low.
Replace at the earliest convenience.
Media(Proxy) Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
Proxy data cannot be recorded because there is no remaining free space on the proxy data SD card. Replace immediately.
Clips(Proxy) Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on the proxy data SD card has been reached. Recording more clips is not
possible. Replace immediately.
Media(Proxy) Near Full
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The remaining free space on the proxy data SD card is getting low.
Replace at the earliest convenience.
Last Clip(Proxy) Rec
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The proxy data currently recording is the last clip that can be recorded, as the maximum number of clips has been reached.
Prepare a new proxy data SD card.
Clips(Proxy) Near Full
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The number of additional clips that can be recorded on the proxy data SD card is getting low. Replace at the earliest
convenience.
Media(A) 1) Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
When using the simultaneous recording function
Media(A) 1) Clips Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing
When using the simultaneous recording function
Media(A) 1) Near Full
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
When using the simultaneous recording function
Media(A) Last Clip Rec
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
When using the simultaneous recording function
1)
1) “(B)” is displayed for cards in slot B.
000
126
10. Maintenance and Inspection: Error/Warning System
Caution and Operation Confirmation Display
The following caution and operation messages may appear in the center of the screen. Follow the
instructions provided to resolve the issue.
Display indication
Cause and Solution
Battery Error
Please Change Battery
An error was detected in the battery pack.
Replace with a normal battery pack.
Backup Battery End
Please Change
The remaining capacity of the backup battery is insufficient.
Replace the backup battery.
Unknown Media(A) 1)
Please Change
A memory card that has been partitioned or a memory card
containing more clips that can be handled by the camcorder was
inserted.
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be
replaced.
Media Error
Media(A) 1) Needs to be Restored
An error occurred on the memory card, and the card must be
restored.
Eject and then re-insert the card, then repair the card.
Media Error
Cannot Record to Media(A) 1)
The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be used
for recording.
Playback may be possible, so making a copy and replacing the
memory card is recommended.
Media Error
Cannot Use Media(A) 1)
The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be used
for recording or playback.
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be
replaced.
Cannot Use Media(A) 1)
Unsupported File System
A card using a different file system or an unformatted card was
inserted.
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be
replaced or formatted using the camcorder.
Media(A) 1) Error
Playback Halted
Cannot continue playback because an error occurred while
reading from the memory card.
If the problem persists, make a copy and replace the memory
card.
Media(A) 1) Error
Recording is stopped because an error occurred on the memory
card.
If the problem persists, replace the memory card.
Different Media is Inserted
Cannot Use Media(A) 1)
Different media was inserted. Eject the inserted card, and insert a
card of the same type as the previously inserted card.
1) “(B)” is displayed for cards in slot B.
127
000
11. Appendix
Usage Precautions
The fan and battery are consumable parts that will
need periodic replacement.
When operating at room temperature, a normal
replacement cycle will be about 5 years.
However, this replacement cycle represents only
a general guideline and does not imply that the
life expectancy of these parts is guaranteed. For
details on parts replacement, contact your dealer.
The life expectancy of the AC adaptor and the
electrolytic capacitor is about 5 years under
normal operating temperatures and normal usage
(8 hours per day; 25 days per month). If usage
exceeds the above normal usage frequency, the
life expectancy may be reduced correspondingly.
Use and storage
Care of the camcorder
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the
lenses or optical filters using a blower.
If the body of the camcorder is dirty, clean it with
a soft, dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth
moistened in a little neutral detergent, then wipe
dry. Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or
thinners, as these may cause discoloration or other
damage to the finish of the camcorder.
In the event of operating problems
If you should experience problems with the
camcorder, contact a Sony service representative.
Use and storage locations
After use
Store in a level, ventilated place.
Avoid using or storing the camcorder in the
following places.
ˎˎIn excessive heat or cold (operating temperature
range: –5 °C to +40 °C (23 °F to 104 °F))
Remember that in summer in warm climates
the temperature inside a car with the windows
closed can easily exceed 50 °C (122 °F).
ˎˎIn damp or dusty locations
ˎˎLocations where the camcorder may be
exposed to rain
ˎˎLocations subject to violent vibration
ˎˎNear strong magnetic fields
ˎˎClose to radio or TV transmitters producing
strong electromagnetic fields.
ˎˎIn direct sunlight or close to heaters for
extended periods
Before storing the camcorder for a long period
To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable
communications devices
Do not subject the camcorder to severe shocks
ˎˎThe internal mechanism may be damaged or
the body warped.
ˎˎIf an accessory mounted on the accessory shoe
is subjected to severe shock, the accessory shoe
may be damaged. In such a case, stop using
it and contact your dealer or a Sony service
representative.
Do not cover the camcorder while operating
Putting a cloth, for example, over the camcorder
can cause excessive internal heat build-up.
Always turn off the POWER switch.
Remove the battery pack.
Shipping
ˎˎRemove the media before transporting the
camcorder.
ˎˎIf sending the camcorder by truck, ship, air,
or other transportation service, pack it in the
shipping carton of the camcorder.
The use of portable telephones and other
communications devices near this camcorder can
result in malfunction and interference with audio
and video signals.
It is recommended that the portable
communications devices near this camcorder be
powered off.
Condensation
White flecks
It is important to fit the lens correctly, as otherwise
damage may result. Be sure to refer to the section
“Mounting and Adjusting the Lens” (page 25).
Although the CMOS image sensors are produced
with high-precision technologies, fine white flecks
may be generated on the screen in rare cases,
caused by cosmic rays, etc. This is related to the
principle of CMOS image sensors and is not a
malfunction.
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the
following cases:
ˎˎwhen operating at a high environmental
temperature
ˎˎwhen you have raised the master gain
(sensitivity)
ˎˎwhen operating in Slow-Shutter mode
The problem may be alleviated by executing
automatic black balance adjustment.
Viewfinder
Aliasing
If the unit is suddenly taken from a cold to a warm
location, or if ambient temperature suddenly
rises, moisture may form on the outer surface of
the unit and/or inside of the unit. This is known
as condensation. If condensation occurs, turn off
the unit and wait until the condensation clears
before operating the unit. Operating the unit while
condensation is present may damage the unit.
Fitting the zoom lens
Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece
lens pointing directly at the sun.
The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s rays
and melt the interior of the viewfinder.
About the LCD panels
The LCD panel fitted to this unit is manufactured
with high precision technology, giving a
functioning pixel ratio of at least 99.99%. Thus a
very small proportion of pixels may be “stuck”,
either always off (black), always on (red, green, or
blue), or flashing. In addition, over a long period
of use, because of the physical characteristics of
the liquid crystal display, such “stuck” pixels may
appear spontaneously. These problems are not a
malfunction. Note that any such problems have no
effect on recorded data.
Phenomena specific to CMOS image sensors
The following phenomena that may appear in
images are specific to CMOS (Complementary
Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensors. They
do not indicate malfunctions.
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they
may appear jagged or flicker.
Flicker
If recording is made under lighting produced
by discharge tubes, such as fluorescent, sodium,
or mercury-vapor lamps, the screen may flicker,
colors may vary, or horizontal stripes may appear
distorted.
In such cases, set the flicker-reduction function to
auto mode (page 101).
If the frame rate selected for recording is close
to the power-supply frequency, flicker may not
be reduced sufficiently even if you activate the
Flicker-Reduction function. In such cases, use the
electronic shutter.
000
128
11. Appendix: Usage Precautions
Focal plane
Owing to the characteristics of the pickup
elements (CMOS image sensors) for reading video
signals, subjects that quickly move across the
screen may appear slightly skewed.
Flashband
The luminance at the top and bottom of the
screen may change when shooting a flashlight
beam or a light source that quickly flashes.You can
use the supplied application software to correct
clips that contain frames with flash bands.
Fragmentation
If pictures cannot be recorded/reproduced
properly, try formatting the recording media.
While repeating picture recording/playback with
a certain recording media for an extended period,
files in the media may be fragmented, disabling
proper recording/storage. In such a case, make
a backup of clips in the media then perform
formatting of the media using Operation >Format
Media (page 84) in the setup menu.
Notes on security
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF
ANY KIND RESULTING FROM A FAILURE TO
IMPLEMENT PROPER SECURITY MEASURES
ON TRANSMISSION DEVICES, UNAVOIDABLE
DATA LEAKS RESULTING FROM TRANSMISSION
SPECIFICATIONS, OR SECURITY PROBLEMS OF
ANY KIND.
ˎˎDepending on the operating environment,
unauthorized third parties on the network may
be able to access the unit. When connecting the
unit to the network, be sure to confirm that the
network is protected securely.
ˎˎCommunication content may be unknowingly
intercepted by unauthorized third parties in the
vicinity of the signals. When using wireless LAN
communication, implement security measures
properly to protect the communication content.
ˎˎFrom a safety standpoint, when using the unit
connected with the network, it is strongly
recommended to access the Control window
via a Web browser and change the access
limitation settings from the factory preset values
(page 67).
Changing the password regularly is also
recommended.
ˎˎDo not browse any other website in the Web
browser while making settings or after making
settings. Since the login status remains in the
Web browser, close the Web browser when you
complete the settings to prevent unauthorized
third parties from using the unit or harmful
programs from running.
About GPS
The GPS (Global Positioning System) is a system
that calculates geographical location from highly
accurate US space satellites. This system allows
you to pinpoint your exact location on the earth.
The GPS satellites are located in 6 orbits, 20,000 km
above the earth. The GPS system consists of 24 or
more GPS satellites.
A GPS receiver receives radio signals from the
satellites, and calculates the current location of the
receiver based on the orbital information (almanac
data) and travel time of the signals, etc.
Determining a location is called “triangulating.” A
GPS receiver can determine the location’s latitude
and longitude by receiving signals from 3 or more
satellites.
ˎˎAs the positions of GPS satellites vary constantly,
it may take longer to determine the location or
the receiver may not be able to determine the
location at all, depending on the location and
time you use the camcorder.
ˎˎ“GPS” is a system for determining geographic
location by triangulating radio signals from
GPS satellites. Avoid using the camcorder
in places where radio signals are blocked or
reflected, such as a shadowy place surrounded
by buildings or trees, etc. Use the camcorder in
open sky environments.
ˎˎYou may not be able to record location
information at locations or in situations where
radio signals from the GPS satellites do not
reach the camcorder as follows.
–– In tunnels, indoors or under the shade of
buildings.
–– Between tall buildings or at narrow streets
surrounded by buildings.
–– In underground locations, locations
surrounded by dense trees, under an
elevated bridge, or in locations where
magnetic fields are generated, such as near
high voltage cables.
–– Near devices that generate radio signals of
the same frequency band as the camcorder:
near 1.5 GHz band mobile telephones, etc.
ˎˎIf you upload and share the images which are
recorded when the setting “GPS” is ”On,” the
record location may be exposed on the internet
even if you do not intend to do so. If you do not
want to record location information, select “Off”
for “GPS” (page 91).
On triangulating errors
ˎˎIf you move to another location right after
setting “GPS” to “On” in the menu, it may
take a longer time for the camcorder to start
triangulating, compared to when you stay in the
same place.
ˎˎError caused by the position of GPS satellites
The camcorder automatically triangulates your
current location when the camcorder receives
radio signals from 3 or more GPS satellites.
The triangulating error allowed by the GPS
satellites is about 10 m (33 feet). Depending
on the environment of the location, the
triangulating error can be greater. In this case,
your actual location may not match the location
on the map based on the GPS information.
Meanwhile, the GPS satellites are controlled
by the United States Department of Defense,
and the degree of accuracy may be changed
intentionally.
ˎˎError during the triangulating process
The camcorder acquires location information
periodically during triangulating.
On the restriction of use of GPS
Use GPS in accordance with the regulations of the
situation, the countries/regions of use.
On the geographic coordinate system
The “WGS-84” geographic coordinate system is
used.
11. Appendix
Specifications
General
150 (6)
Mass
Approx. 3.6 kg (7 lb 15 oz) (body only)
Dimensions (Unit: mm (inch), excluding
protrusions, body only) 1)
269 (10 5/8)
000
129
332 (13 1/8)
1) The values for dimensions are approximate.
Power requirements
12 V (11 V to 17.0 V) DC
Power consumption
Approx. 22 W (body only, when
recording in XAVC, with LCD
monitor on)
Approx. 24 W (CBK-VF02 viewfinder,
manual lens, microphone, when
recording in XAVC, with LCD
monitor on)
[Notes]
ˎˎ Do not connect video lights with power consumption of
50 W or greater.
ˎˎ When using a battery, do not allow the total power
consumption of connected peripherals to exceed 40 W.
ˎˎ When using the AC-DN10, do not allow the total power
consumption of connected peripherals to exceed 50 W.
ˎˎ When using the AC-DN2B, do not allow the total power
consumption of connected peripherals to exceed 85 W.
ˎˎ Connect only devices with current consumption of 1.8 A
or lower to the DC OUT connector.
Operating temperature
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Storage temperature
–20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F)
File system
exFAT, UDF
[Note]
UDF support is planned for a future upgrade.
Continuous operating time
Approx. 200 minutes (using BP-L80S)
Recording format (video)
XAVC Intra
XAVC-I mode: CBG, 112 Mbps (max),
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
XAVC Long
XAVC-L 50 mode: VBR, 50 Mbps (max),
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
XAVC-L 35 mode: VBR, 35 Mbps (max),
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
XAVC-L 25 mode: VBR, 25 Mbps (max),
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
MPEG-2 Long GOP
MPEG HD422 mode: CBR, 50 Mbps,
MPEG-2 422P@HL
MPEG HD420 HQ mode: VBR, 35 Mbps
(max), MPEG-2 MP@HL
MPEG IMX
CBR, 50 Mbps
DVCAM
CBR, 25 Mbps
Proxy
AVC/H.264 Main Profile 4:2:0 Long GOP
1280×720/9 Mbps,
640×360/3 Mbps,
480×270/1 Mbps, 500 Kbps (VBR)
Recording format (audio)
XAVC Intra
LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel
XAVC Long
LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel
MPEG-2 Long GOP
MPEG HD422 mode: LPCM 24-bit,
48 kHz, 4-channel
MPEG HD420 HQ mode: LPCM 16-bit,
48 kHz, 4-channel
MPEG IMX
LPCM 16/24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel
DVCAM
LPCM 16-bit, 48 kHz, 2-channel
Proxy
AAC-LC, 128 Kbps, 2-channel
Recording/playback time
XAVC Intra
XAVC-I mode
Approx. 60 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
XAVC Long
XAVC-L 50 mode
Approx. 120 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
XAVC-L 35 mode
Approx. 170 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
XAVC-L 25 mode
Approx. 220 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
MPEG-2 Long GOP
MPEG HD422 mode
Approx. 120 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
MPEG HD420 HQ mode
Approx. 180 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
MPEG IMX
Approx. 120 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
DVCAM
Approx. 220 minutes: Using SBP-64C/
SBS-64G1B (64 GB)
XAVC Long
XAVC-L 50 mode
1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 23.98P, 25P
1280×720/59.94P, 50P
XAVC-L 35 mode
1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 23.98P, 25P
XAVC-L 25 mode
1920×1080/59.94i, 50i
MPEG-2 Long GOP
MPEG HD422 mode
1920×1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 23.98P,
25P
1280×720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 23.98P,
25P
MPEG HD420 HQ mode
1920×1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 23.98P,
25P
1440×1080/59.94i, 50i
1280×720/59.94P, 50P
MPEG IMX
720×486/59.94i
720×576/50i
DVCAM
720×480/59.94i
720×576/50i
Proxy
Main line 1920×1080: 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
Main line 1280×720: 59.94P, 50P,
29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
[Note]
Input/Output Section
Recording frame rate
XAVC Intra
XAVC-I mode
1920×1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 23.98P,
25P
1280×720/59.94P, 50P
Inputs
The recording and playback times are for a continuous
recording as a single clip. The actual times may be shorter,
depending on the number of clips recorded.
GENLOCK IN:
BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms,
unbalanced
TC IN:
BNC type, 0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 kilohms
000
130
11. Appendix: Specifications
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2:
XLR type, 3-pin, female
LINE / AES/EBU / MIC / MIC+48V
switchable
LINE: +4, 0, –3 dBu
AES/EBU: AES3 compliant
MIC: –70 dBu to –30 dBu
MIC IN:
XLR type, 5-pin, female, –70 dBu to
–30 dBu
WRR:
D-sub 15-pin
Analog CH1: –40 dBu
Digital CH1/CH2: –40 dBFS
SDI IN:
SMPTE ST292-1/259 standard
compliant
4-channel audio
Outputs
VIDEO OUT:
BNC type, SD analog composite/HD-Y
switchable
SDI OUT 1/2:
BNC type, 0.8 Vp-p, unbalanced (3G
HD/1.5G HD/SD switchable)
SMPTE ST424/425 Level-A/B,
ST292-1/259 standard compliant
4-channel audio
AUDIO OUT:
XLR type, 5-pin, male, +4/0/–3 dBu
(balanced)
TC OUT: BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
EARPHONE (stereo, minijack):
–11 dBu (reference level output,
maximum monitor volume,
16-ohm load)
HDMI:
Type A, 19-pin
Other
DC IN:
DC OUT:
XLR type, 4-pin, male, 11 V to 17 V DC
Round type 4-pin, 11 V to 17 V DC,
1.8 A maximum rated current
LENS:
12-pin, lens power source (11 V to 17 V
DC, 1.0 A maximum rated current)
REMOTE:8-pin
LIGHT:2-pin
USB:
VF:
4-pin (type A) (2), 4-pin (type B)
Rectangular type 26-pin, round type
20-pin
Network connector:
RJ45 type, 100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3u),
10BASE-T (IEEE 802.3)
Dynamic range
600%
Smear
–135 dB
Camera Section
Sampling frequency
48 kHz
Quantization
16/24-bit
Headroom
20 dB (factory default) (20, 18, 16,
12 dB), EBUL
Frequency response
20 Hz to 20 kHz (±3 dB or less)
Dynamic range
90 dB (typical)
Distortion 0.08% or lower (–40 dBu input level)
Built-in speaker
Monaural, 300 mW output
Imaging element
2/3-inch type, “Exmor” Full HD CMOS
image sensor
1920 (H) × 1080 (V)
Type
3-chip RGB
Optical system
F1.4 prism system
ND filters
1: Clear
2: 1/4ND
3: 1/16ND
4: 1/64ND
Sensitivity F12 (system frequency: 59.94i)
(2000 lx, 89.9% reflectance, 3200K)
Minimum illumination
0.013 lx (F1.4, +42 dB, 16-frame
accumulation)
Image S/N ratio
62 dB (Noise Suppression On)
Horizontal resolution
1000 TVL (TV lines) or higher
Modulation depth
45% or higher (27.5 MHz, screen
center)
Black level 3 ±1% (Black set to [±0] in the setup
menu)
Shutter speed
59.94i/P, 50i/P: 1/60 to 1/2000 sec.
29.97P: 1/40 to 1/2000 sec.
25P: 1/33 to 1/2000 sec.
23.94P: 1/32 to 1/2000 sec.
Slow shutter
2 to 8, 16 frames
Audio Section
Display Section
LCD monitor
Screen size
8.8 cm (3.5 inch) diagonal
Aspect ratio
16:9
Number of pixels
960 (H) × 540 (V)
Media Section
SxS card slots
Form factor: Express Card/34
Number of slots: 2
Connector: PCMCIA Express Card
compliant
Write rate: 50 Mbps or higher
Read rate: 50 Mbps or higher
SD card slots
Proxy (1), Utility (1)
Lens Section (PXW-X400KC)
Lens mount
Sony 2/3-inch bayonet mount
Focal length
8.2 mm to 164 mm
ZoomManual
Zoom factor
20
Maximum aperture ratio
1:1.9
Iris
Auto/Manual switchable
F1.9 to F16 and C (Close)
Focus range
Auto/Manual switchable
Range
900 mm to ∞ (macro OFF)
10 mm to ∞ (macro ON, wide
angle)
Filter diameter
M82 mm, 0.75 mm pitch
Macro
ON/OFF selectable
Lens Section (PXW-X400KF)
Lens mount
Sony 2/3-inch bayonet mount
Focal length
8 mm to 128 mm
(35 mm equivalent: 31.5 mm to
503 mm)
Zoom
Power/Manual switchable
000
131
11. Appendix: Specifications
Zoom factor
16
Maximum aperture ratio
1:1.9
Iris
Auto/Manual switchable
F1.9 to F16 and C (Close)
Focus range
Auto/Manual switchable
Range
800 mm to ∞ (macro OFF)
50 mm to ∞ (macro ON, wide
angle)
732 mm to ∞ (macro ON,
telephoto)
Filter diameter
M82 mm, 0.75 mm pitch
Macro
ON/OFF selectable
Supplied Accessories
Shoulder belt (1)
Cold shoe kit (1)
Lens mount cap
USB wireless LAN module (IFU-WLM3)
Protective cap (1)
Guard (1)
Before Using This Unit (1)
Operating Instructions (CD-ROM) (1)
Lens (supplied with PXW-X400KC) (1)
Autofocus lens (supplied with PXW-X400KF) (1)
Flange focal length (flange back) adjustment chart (1)
Stereo microphone (supplied with PXW-X400KC/
PXW-X400KF) (1)
Viewfinder (supplied with PXW-X400KC/PXWX400KF) (1)
Stereo microphone windscreen (supplied with
PXW-X400KC/PXW-X400KF) (1)
Related Equipment
Power supply and related equipment
AC adaptor
AC-DN10/DN2B
Battery pack
BP-L80S
Battery charger
BC-L70/L90
Lens, viewfinder and related equipment
Lens
2/3-inch bayonet mount lens only
Viewfinder
HDVF-20A/200/L750/EL20/EL30
Viewfinder rotation bracket
BKW-401
Equipment for remote control
Remote control unit
RM-B170
RCP-1000/1500/1530
RCP-1001/1501
[Note]
Command network unit (CNU) is not supported.
HD camera adaptor
Recording media
SxS memory cards
SxS PRO+ series
SxS PRO series
SxS-1 series
Audio equipment
Microphone
ECM-678/674/673/680S
Microphone holder
CAC-12
Digital wireless receiver
DWR-S02D
UHF synthesizer tuner unit
WRR-855S/860C/861/862
Other peripheral devices
Tripod attachment
VCT-14/U14
Video light
UC-D200A (Nippon Video System NIPROS)
Ultralight (Anton Bauer)
Pad
CBK-SP01 soft-type shoulder pad
Wireless LAN adaptor
CBK-WA02
Network adaptor kit
CBK-NA1
CA-FB70/TX70
Products for maintenance, ease of use/handling
[Note]
Attachment bracket
A-2092-367-
Media adaptor
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
If SDI OUT2 is used when the CA-FB70 is attached, use an
L-shaped adaptor.
MEAD-SD02 (for SDXC cards)
XQD ExpressCard adaptor
QDA-EX1 (for XQD memory cards)
Notes
ˎˎAlways make a test recording, and verify that it
was recorded successfully.
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES
OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT
ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR
ITS RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE
SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE
SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
ˎˎAlways verify that the unit is operating
properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR
REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS
OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE
TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER DURING THE
WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF
THE WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON
WHATSOEVER.
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CLAIMS OF
ANY KIND MADE BY USERS OF THIS UNIT OR
MADE BY THIRD PARTIES.
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS,
REPAIR, OR REPRODUCTION OF ANY DATA
RECORDED ON THE INTERNAL STORAGE
SYSTEM, RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR
STORAGE SYSTEMS.
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE
TERMINATION OR DISCONTINUATION OF ANY
SERVICES RELATED TO THIS UNIT THAT MAY
RESULT DUE TO CIRCUMSTANCES OF ANY
KIND.
000
132
11. Appendix: Specifications
Software Downloads
When the unit is used with a PC connection,
download any device drivers, plug-ins, and
application software you require from the
following websites.
Sony Professional products website:
U.S.A.http://pro.sony.com
Canadahttp://www.sonybiz.ca
Latin America
http://sonypro-latin.com
Europehttp://www.pro.sony.eu/pro
Middle East, Africa http://sony-psmea.com
Russiahttp://sony.ru/pro/
Brazilhttp://sonypro.com.br
Australiahttp://pro.sony.com.au
New Zealand
http://pro.sony.co.nz
Japanhttp://www.sonybsc.com
Asia Pacific
http://pro.sony-asia.com
Koreahttp://bp.sony.co.kr
Chinahttp://pro.sony.com.cn
Indiahttp://pro.sony.co.in
Sony Creative Software, software download page:
http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/download/
software_for_sony_equipment
Chart of Peripheral Devices and Accessories
ECM680S/678/674/673
Microphone
MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio
License
HD monitor/SD monitor
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4
VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A
CONSUMER FOR
CAC-12
Microphone holder
CBK-VF02
Viewfinder
HDVF-20A/200/L750/EL20/EL30
Viewfinder
PXW-X400 a)
WRR-855S/862/861
UHF Synthesizer Tuner Unit
DWR-S02D Digital Wireless Receiver
SxS memory cards
SBS-32G1B, SBP-64C/SBS-64G1B,
SBP-128C/SBS-128G1B
MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor
QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adaptor
RM-B170
RCP-1000/1500/1530
RCP-1001/1501
Remote Control Unit
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED
FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL,
INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND
LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA,
LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
CA-FB70 HD Camera Adaptor
CA-TX70 HD Camera Adaptor
VCT-14
Tripod attachment
BP-L80S
Battery Pack
BC-L70
Battery Charger
(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE
MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD (“MPEG-4 VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO.
BC-L90
Battery Charger
AC-DN10/DN2B
AC Adaptor
a) The carrying case is large enough to hold the camcorder with lens and microphone mounted. However, remove them if
they protrude more than 25 cm (9 7/8 inches) from the front of the main unit.
MPEG LA is offering licenses for (i) manufacturing/
sales of any storage media storing MPEG-4 Visual
video information (ii) distribution/broadcasting of
MPEG-4 Visual video information in any manner
(such as online video distribution service, internet
broadcasting, TV broadcasting). Other usage of this
product may be required to obtain license from
MPEGLA. Please contact MPEG LA for any further
information. MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206, http://
www.mpegla.com
000
133
11. Appendix: Specifications
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT:
BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE CONTAINED IN THE
CAMCORDER, PLEASE READ THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”) CAREFULLY. BY USING THE SOFTWARE
YOU ARE ACCEPTING THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO
NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA, YOU MAY NOT USE
THE SOFTWARE.
This EULA is a legal agreement between you and Sony
Corporation (“SONY”). This EULA governs your rights
and obligations regarding the software of SONY and/or
its third party licensors (including SONY’s affiliates) and
their respective affiliates (collectively, the “THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS”) contained in the camcorder, together with any
updates/ upgrades provided by SONY, any printed, on-line or
other electronic documentation for such software, and any
data files created by operation of such software (collectively,
the “SOFTWARE”).
Notwithstanding the foregoing, any software in the
SOFTWARE having a separate end user license agreement
(including, but not limited to, GNU General Public license
and Lesser/Library General Public License) shall be covered
by such applicable separate end user license agreement
in lieu of the terms of this EULA to the extent required by
such separate end user license agreement (“EXCLUDED
SOFTWARE”).
SOFTWARE LICENSE
The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. The SOFTWARE is
protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws
and international treaties.
COPYRIGHT
All right and title in and to the SOFTWARE (including, but not
limited to, any images, photographs, animation, video, audio,
music, text and “applets” incorporated into the SOFTWARE)
is owned by SONY or one or more of the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS.
GRANT OF LICENSE
SONY grants you a limited license to use the SOFTWARE
solely in connection with the camcorder and only for your
individual use. SONY and the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS
expressly reserve all rights, title and interest (including, but
not limited to, all intellectual property rights) in and to the
SOFTWARE that this EULA does not specifically grant to you.
REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
You may not copy, publish, adapt, redistribute, attempt to
derive source code, modify, reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble any of the SOFTWARE, whether in whole or in
part, or create any derivative works from or of the SOFTWARE
unless such derivative works are intentionally facilitated by
the SOFTWARE. You may not modify or tamper with any
digital rights management functionality of the SOFTWARE.
You may not bypass, modify, defeat or circumvent any
of the functions or protections of the SOFTWARE or any
mechanisms operatively linked to the SOFTWARE. You may
not separate any individual component of the SOFTWARE
for use on more than one camcorder unless expressly
authorized to do so by SONY. You may not remove, alter,
cover or deface any trademarks or notices on the SOFTWARE.
You may not share, distribute, rent, lease, sublicense, assign,
transfer or sell the SOFTWARE. The software, network
services or other products other than SOFTWARE upon
which the SOFTWARE’S performance depends might be
interrupted or discontinued at the discretion of the suppliers
(software suppliers, service suppliers, or SONY). SONY
and such suppliers do not warrant that the SOFTWARE,
network services, contents or other products will continue
to be available, or will operate without interruption or
modification.
EXCLUDED SOFTWARE AND OPEN SOURCE
COMPONENTS
Notwithstanding the foregoing limited license grant, you
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE may include EXCLUDED
SOFTWARE. Certain EXCLUDED SOFTWARE may be
covered by open source software licenses (“Open Source
Components”), which means any software licenses approved
as open source licenses by the Open Source Initiative or any
substantially similar licenses, including but not limited to any
license that, as a condition of distribution of the software
licensed under such license, requires that the distributor
make the software available in source code format. If and
to the extent disclosure is required, please visit www.sony.
com/linux or other SONY-designated web site for a list of
applicable OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS included in the
SOFTWARE from time to time, and the applicable terms and
conditions governing its use. Such terms and conditions
may be changed by the applicable third party at any time
without liability to you. To the extent required by the licenses
covering EXCLUDED SOFTWARE, the terms of such licenses
will apply in lieu of the terms of this EULA. To the extent the
terms of the licenses applicable to EXCLUDED SOFTWARE
prohibit any of the restrictions in this EULA with respect to
such EXCLUDED SOFTWARE, such restrictions will not apply
to such EXCLUDED SOFTWARE. To the extent the terms of
the licenses applicable to Open Source Components require
SONY to make an offer to provide source code in connection
with the SOFTWARE, such offer is hereby made.
USE OF SOFTWARE WITH COPYRIGHTED
MATERIALS
The SOFTWARE may be capable of being used by you to
view, store, process and/or use content created by you and/
or third parties. Such content may be protected by copyright,
other intellectual property laws, and/or agreements. You
agree to use the SOFTWARE only in compliance with all
such laws and agreements that apply to such content. You
acknowledge and agree that SONY may take appropriate
measures to protect the copyright of content stored,
processed or used by the SOFTWARE. Such measures
include, but are not limited to, counting the frequency of
your backup and restoration through certain SOFTWARE
features, refusal to accept your request to enable restoration
of data, and termination of this EULA in the event of your
illegitimate use of the SOFTWARE.
CONTENT SERVICE
PLEASE ALSO NOTE THAT THE SOFTWARE MAY BE DESIGNED
TO BE USED WITH CONTENT AVAILABLE THROUGH ONE OR
MORE CONTENT SERVICES (“CONTENT SERVICE”). USE OF
THE SERVICE AND THAT CONTENT IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS
OF SERVICE OF THAT CONTENT SERVICE. IF YOU DECLINE
TO ACCEPT THOSE TERMS, YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
WILL BE LIMITED. You acknowledge and agree that certain
content and services available through the SOFTWARE
may be provided by third parties over which SONY has
no control. USE OF THE CONTENT SERVICE REQUIRES AN
INTERNET CONNECTION. THE CONTENT SERVICE MAY BE
DISCONTINUED AT ANY TIME.
INTERNET CONNECTIVITY AND THIRD PARTY
SERVICES
You acknowledge and agree that access to certain
SOFTWARE features may require an Internet connection
for which you are solely responsible. Further, you are solely
responsible for payment of any third party fees associated
with your Internet connection, including but not limited
to Internet service provider or airtime charges. Operation
of the SOFTWARE may be limited or restricted depending
on the capabilities, bandwidth or technical limitations of
your Internet connection and service. The provision, quality
and security of such Internet connectivity are the sole
responsibility of the third party providing such service.
EXPORT AND OTHER REGULATIONS
You agree to comply with all applicable export and re-export
restrictions and regulations of the area or country in which
you reside, and not to transfer, or authorize the transfer,
of the SOFTWARE to a prohibited country or otherwise in
violation of any such restrictions or regulations.
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES
The SOFTWARE is not fault-tolerant and is not designed,
manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-line control
equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe
performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities,
aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic
control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems,
in which the failure of the SOFTWARE could lead to death,
personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage
(“HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES”). SONY, each of the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS, and each of their respective affiliates specifically
disclaim any express or implied warranty, duty or condition
of fitness for HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.
EXCLUSION OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE
You acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is
at your sole risk and that you are responsible for use of the
SOFTWARE. The SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS,” without
warranty, duty or condition of any kind.
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for
purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRDPARTY SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as
“SONY”) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, DUTIES
OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SONY DOES NOT WARRANT OR
MAKE ANY CONDITIONS OR REPRESENTATIONS (A) THAT
THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN ANY OF THE SOFTWARE
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THEY WILL
BE UPDATED, (B) THAT THE OPERATION OF ANY OF THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECT OR ERROR-FREE OR THAT ANY
DEFECTS WILL BE CORRECTED, (C) THAT THE SOFTWARE
WILL NOT DAMAGE ANY OTHER SOFTWARE, HARDWARE
OR DATA, (D) THAT ANY SOFTWARE, NETWORK SERVICES
(INCLUDING THE INTERNET) OR PRODUCTS (OTHER
THAN THE SOFTWARE) UPON WHICH THE SOFTWARE’S
PERFORMANCE DEPENDS WILL CONTINUE TO BE AVAILABLE,
UNINTERRUPTED OR UNMODIFIED, AND (E) REGARDING
THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE
IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR
OTHERWISE.
NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN
BY SONY OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF SONY
SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, DUTY OR CONDITION OR
IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY.
SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME
THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THESE
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
000
134
11. Appendix: Specifications
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for
purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as “SONY”) SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY RELATED
TO THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF
REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE
OR ANY ASSOCIATED HARDWARE, DOWN TIME AND USER’S
TIME, EVEN IF ANY OF THEM HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ANY CASE, EACH AND
ALL OF THEIR AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION
OF THIS EULA SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. SOME JURISDICTIONS
DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
CONSENT TO USE OF NON-PERSONAL
INFORMATION, LOCATION DATA, DATA SECURITY
You acknowledge and agree that SONY and its affiliates,
partners and agents may read, collect, transfer, process and
store certain information collected from the SOFTWARE,
including but not limited to information about (i) the
SOFTWARE and (ii) the software applications, contents and
peripheral devices that interact with your camcorder and the
SOFTWARE (“Information”). Information includes, but is not
limited to: (1) unique identifiers relating to your camcorder
and its components; (2) performance of the camcorder, the
SOFTWARE and their components; (3) configurations of your
camcorder, the SOFTWARE and the software applications,
contents and peripheral devices that interact with the
camcorder and the SOFTWARE; (4) use and frequency of use
of the functions of (x) the SOFTWARE, and (y) the software
applications, contents and peripheral devices that interact
with the SOFTWARE; and (5) location data, as indicated
below. SONY and its affiliates, partners and agents may use
and disclose Information subject to applicable laws in order
to improve its products and services or to provide products
or services to you. Such uses include, but are not limited
to: (a) administering the functionalities of the SOFTWARE;
(b) to improve, service, update or upgrade the SOFTWARE;
(c) improving, developing and enhancing the current and
future products and services of SONY and other parties; (d)
to provide you with information about the products and
services offered by SONY and other parties; (e) complying
with applicable laws or regulations; and (f) to the extent
offered, providing you with location-based services of SONY
and other parties, as indicated below. In addition, SONY
retains the right to use Information to protect itself and third
parties from illegal, criminal or harmful conduct.
Certain services available through the SOFTWARE may rely
upon location information, including, but not limited to, the
geographic location of the camcorder. You acknowledge
that for the purpose of providing such services, SONY,
the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS or their partners may collect,
archive, process and use such location data, and that such
services are governed by the privacy policies of SONY or
such third party. By using any such services, you agree that
you have reviewed the privacy policies applicable to such
services and consent to such activities.
SONY, its affiliates, partners and agents will not intentionally
use Information to personally identify the owner or user of
the SOFTWARE without your knowledge or consent. Any use
of Information will be in accordance with the privacy policies
of SONY or such third party. Please contact applicable
contact address of each area or country for SONY’s current
privacy policy.
Please contact applicable third parties for privacy policies
relating to personally identifiable and other information
you provide when you use or access third party software or
services.
Information may be processed, stored or transferred to
SONY, its affiliates or agents which are located in countries
outside of your country of residence. Data protection and
information privacy laws in certain countries may not offer
the same level of protection as your country of residence and
you may have fewer legal rights in relation to Information
processed and stored in, or transferred to, such countries.
SONY will use reasonable efforts to take appropriate
technical and organizational steps to prevent unauthorized
access to or disclosure of Information, but does not warrant it
will eliminate all risk of misuse of such Information.
AUTOMATIC UPDATE FEATURE
From time to time, SONY or the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS may
automatically update or otherwise modify the SOFTWARE,
including, but not limited to, for purposes of enhancement
of security functions, error correction and improvement of
functions, at such time as you interact with SONY’s or third
parties’ servers, or otherwise. Such updates or modifications
may delete or change the nature of features or other
aspects of the SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to,
functions you may rely upon. You acknowledge and agree
that such activities may occur at SONY’s sole discretion and
that SONY may condition continued use of the SOFTWARE
upon your complete installation or acceptance of such
update or modifications. Any updates/modifications shall be
deemed to be, and shall constitute part of, the SOFTWARE
for purposes of this EULA. By acceptance of this EULA, you
consent to such update/ modification.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT, WAIVER, SEVERABILITY
This EULA and SONY’s privacy policy, each as amended and
modified from time to time, together constitute the entire
agreement between you and SONY with respect to the
SOFTWARE. The failure of SONY to exercise or enforce any
right or provision of this EULA shall not constitute a waiver of
such right or provision. If any part of this EULA is held invalid,
illegal, or unenforceable, that provision shall be enforced to
the maximum extent permissible so as to maintain the intent
of this EULA, and the other parts will remain in full force and
effect.
GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION
The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this EULA.
This EULA shall be governed by the laws of Japan, without
regards to conflict of laws provisions. Any dispute arising out
of this EULA shall be subject to the exclusive venue of the
Tokyo District Court in Japan, and the parties hereby consent
to the venue and jurisdiction of such courts.
EQUITABLE REMEDIES
Notwithstanding anything contained in this EULA to the
contrary, you acknowledge and agree that any violation
of or non-compliance with this EULA by you will cause
irreparable harm to SONY, for which monetary damages
would be inadequate, and you consent to SONY obtaining
any injunctive or equitable relief that SONY deems necessary
or appropriate in such circumstances. SONY may also take
any legal and technical remedies to prevent violation of
and/or to enforce this EULA, including, but not limited to,
immediate termination of your use of the SOFTWARE, if
SONY believes in its sole discretion that you are violating or
intend to violate this EULA. These remedies are in addition
to any other remedies SONY may have at law, in equity or
under contract.
TERMINATION
Without prejudice to any of its other rights, SONY may
terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with any of its terms.
In case of such termination, you must: (i) cease all use, and
destroy any copies, of the SOFTWARE; (ii) comply with the
requirements in the section below entitled “Your Account
Responsibilities”.
AMENDMENT
SONY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AMEND ANY OF THE TERMS
OF THIS EULA AT ITS SOLE DISCRETION BY POSTING NOTICE
ON A SONY DESIGNATED WEB SITE, BY EMAIL NOTIFICATION
TO AN EMAIL ADDRESS PROVIDED BY YOU, BY PROVIDING
NOTICE AS PART OF THE PROCESS IN WHICH YOU OBTAIN
UPGRADES/ UPDATES OR BY ANY OTHER LEGALLY
RECOGNIZABLE FORM OF NOTICE. If you do not agree to
the amendment, you should promptly contact SONY for
instructions. Your continued use of the SOFTWARE after
the effective date of any such notice shall be deemed your
agreement to be bound by such amendment.
THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES
Each THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER is an express intended thirdparty beneficiary of, and shall have the right to enforce, each
provision of this EULA with respect to the SOFTWARE of such
party.
Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, you
may contact SONY by writing to SONY at applicable contact
address of each area or country.
Copyright © 2012 Sony Corporation.
000
135
11. Appendix: Specifications
Open Software Licenses
Trademarks
On the basis of license contracts between Sony
and the software copyright holders, this product
uses open software.
To meet the requirements of the software
copyright holders, Sony is obligated to inform you
of the content of these licenses.
For the content of these licenses, see “License1.
pdf” in the “License” folder of the supplied CDROM.
ˎˎAndroid and Google Chrome are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Google, Inc.
ˎˎMicrosoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/
or other countries.
ˎˎApple, Macintosh, Safari, and iPhone and their
logos are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Apple Inc. registered in the US and other
countries.
ˎˎThe terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC in the United States and other
countries.
ˎˎWi-Fi Protected SetupTM (WPS) is a trademark of
the Wi-Fi Alliance.
ˎˎAll system names and product names are
registered trademarks or trademarks of their
respective owners. Trademarked items are not
indicated by ® or ™ symbols in this document.